CASH III BATHROOM AND BREAKROOM FACILITY

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF

CASH III

BATHROOM AND BREAKROOM FACILITY

NOVELIS CORPORATION 448 COUNTY ROUTE 1A

OSWEGO, NEW YORK 13126

C&S PROJECT: F89.071.001

FEBRUARY 2017

C&S ENGINEERS, INC. 499 Col. Eileen Collins Boulevard

Syracuse, New York 13212

NO ALTERATION PERMITTED HEREIN EXCEPT AS PROVIDED UNDER SECTION 7209

SUBDIVISION 2 OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW.

TOC-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CASH III – BATHROOM AND BREAKROOM FACILITY

SPECIFICATIONS

NOVELIS DOCUMENTS (SEPARATE ATTACHMENT)

NOVELIS ONSITE, CAPITAL EQUIPMENT, AND ENGINEERING SERVICES

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PLAN

NOVELIS LOSS CONTROL DATA QUESTIONNAIRE

NOVELIS SUPPLIER QUESTIONNAIRE

NOVELIS BID FORM (SUPPLIED IN PDF AND MS EXCEL – RETURN IN BOTH

FORMATS)

NOVELIS – BROWZ SAFETY PROGRAM PARTICIPATION REQUIREMENT

BROWZ MEMBERSHIP PACKET

NOVELIS LOSS PREVENTION DOCUMENTS

01 - GENERAL LOSS PREVENTION STANDARD–PLANT BASED PROGRAMS

05 - ELECTRICAL CABLES

20 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM

23 - OFFICES

24 - CONSTRUCTION SITES

25 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

DIVISION 0 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

001116 INVITATION TO BID

002513 PREBID MEETINGS

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY

012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

014200 REFERENCES

016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

017300 EXECUTION

017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

TOC-2

017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE

033001 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 4 MASONRY

042000 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 5 METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

053100 STEEL DECKING

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

055119 METAL GRATING STAIRS

055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

066400 PLASTIC PANELING

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

087111 DOOR HARDWARE

088000 GLAZING

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092900 GYPSUM BOARD

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

099100 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

102113.15 STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS

102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

105113 METAL LOCKERS

CONTRACT DRAWINGS (SEPARATE ATTACHMENT)

GENERAL

G-001 TITLE SHEET

STRUCTURAL

S-001 GENERAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS, AND

S-101 PLANS AND SECTIONS

S-301 ENLARGED STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS, AND DETAILS

TOC-3

ARCHITECTURAL

A-001 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS & DETAILS

A-101 FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR PLANS

A-102 FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLANS

A-401 ENLARGED PLANS, TOILET ACCESSORY DETAIL & SCHEDULE

SPRINKLER

FP-001 DETAILS, NOTES, AND SYMBOLS

FP-101 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN

FIRE ALARM

FA-001 DETAILS, NOTES, & SYMBOLS

FA-101 FIRE ALARM PLAN

PLUMBING

P-101 PLUMBING PLANS, RISER DIAGRAMS, SYMBOL LIST AND DETAILS

MECHANICAL

M-001 GENERAL NOTES/ABBREVIATIONS/ SYMBOLS

M-101 FIRST & SECOND HVAC PLANS

M-102 THIRD FLOOR PLAN ("ROOF")

M-501 DETAILS

M-601 SCHEDULES

M-602 SPECIFICATIONS

M-603 SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL

E-001 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERAL NOTES

E-100 FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR POWER PLAN

E-101 THIRD FLOOR POWER PLAN ("ROOF")

EL-100 FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN

E-600 POWER AND LIGHTING SCHEDULES

E-601 SPECIFICATIONS

REFERENCE DRAWINGS FROM PREVIOUS PROJECT (SEPARATE ATTACHMENT)

SITE/CIVIL

C-106 SITE UTILITY PLAN

C-503 SITE DETAILS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

LOSS PREVENTION ENGINEERING STANDARDS Global Insurance and Risk Management Department Standard Owner: Jeffrey Hunt – Corporate Manager, Property Conservation

NVLFPES – 01 GENERAL LOSS PREVENTION STANDARD – PLANT BASED PROGRAMS Revised October 26, 2016

©NOVELIS, INC: This Document is Confidential Proprietary Information

Revision Date: October 26, 2017 Page 1

1.0 PURPOSE

1.1 This standard details the scope of the plant-based property loss prevention

programs that support Novelis’ corporate property conservation programs. The standard also outlines the management programs each Novelis operating plant worldwide shall establish to adequately address loss prevention, property conservation and continuity of production concerns on a day-to-day basis.

1.2 These requirements are consistent with Novelis’ Highly Protected Risk (HPR) approach to managing risk at our operating plants in accordance with the underwriting requirements of our Global Property Insurance Program as managed by Novelis’ Global Risk Management Department (RMD).

2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This standard establishes the loss prevention and property conservation

requirements associated with the following human factor programs at Novelis facilities worldwide: - Establishment of the Property Conservation Coordinator (PCC) position - Loss Prevention Inspection Program (input to monthly Safety Inspections) - Loss Prevention Management of Change (Input to plant-wide MOC Program) - Inspection Testing and Maintenance (ITM) of Protection Systems - Protection System Impairment Handling - Loss Prevention Survey Recommendation Response and Resolution - Loss Reporting and Investigation (input to EHS Incident Reporting Program) - Emergency Response and Action Plans (Input to plant-wide program) - Hot Work Cutting and Welding Program (Input to plant-wide Program) - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Program (Input to plant-wide safety

Program) - Other Loss Prevention Concerns (see Section 4.11)

2.2 Novelis locations shall have plant-based management programs that address the subjects identified above to ensure that a comprehensive loss prevention program is in place to manage property risks at Novelis’ operating plants. These requirements apply to Novelis’ operating plants worldwide.

NVLFPES – 01 GENERAL LOSS PREVENTION STANDARD – PLANT BASED PROGRAMS



3.0 DEFINITIONS 3.1 HPR - Highly Protected Risk, is used to describe plants that have redundant levels

of fire protection systems and management programs in place to minimize the risk of loss at the plant. HPR facilities typically do not rely on one level of protection to address risk but rather establish a layered risk control approach to manage risk at an acceptable level, HPR facilities have very few insurance recommendations on the TSP loss prevention survey and work hard to resolve the items identified in a timely manner as resources, e.g. CAPEX, are made available.

3.2 Property Conservation Coordinator (PCC) - The Novelis employee at a given facility that has the responsibility to establish, communicate and monitor loss prevention programs. The PCC has management responsibility for loss prevention at a given Novelis location. Property conservation at the plant level is the plant manager’s responsibility. The plant manager typically delegates this responsibility to the PCC to manage day-to-day loss prevention activities and related management responsibilities.

3.3 Novelis Corporate Manager, Property Conservation – Function in the Global Insurance and Risk Management Department responsible for establishing technical insurance programs for the corporation, contracting with insurance Technical Service Providers (TSP) to perform inspections of Novelis facilities and providing general loss prevention support to Novelis operating facilities worldwide.

3.4 Insurance Technical Service Provider (TSP) of record – The contracted insurance loss prevention engineering services company that is responsible for specific Novelis plants. This person performs the loss prevention survey, provides loss prevention input into the management of change process, reviews and approves technical submittals and provides other engineering support services as requested by the plant or Novelis corporate. In general there are Three service contracts, 3.4.1 General loss prevention Inspections - GRC 3.4.2 Machinery loss prevention Inspections - GRC 3.4.3 Jurisdictional boiler and pressure vessel inspections - ARISE

3.5 Impairment – A condition that renders a fire protection system, or portion of a

system, inoperable to the point it would not perform its intended function.




4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 ESTABLISHMENT OF THE PROPERTY CONSERVATION COORDINATOR

(PCC) POSITION 4.1.1 The management of loss prevention at each Novelis operating plant is a key

component of our corporate Property Conservation Program. The establishment of the plant based (PCC) function allows Novelis to manage loss prevention “close to the risk” on a day-to-day basis.

4.1.2 Each Novelis operating facility worldwide shall appoint a (PCC) to manage, coordinate and oversee loss prevention and property conservation programs and input to other key programs related to the site. At larger facilities this responsibility may be split into two technical areas: 4.1.2.1 Property Conservation Coordinator – Property (PCC-P) 4.1.2.2 Property Conservation Coordinator – Machinery (PCC-M)

4.1.3 The responsibility for protecting the company’s assets from property loss at a

given facility rests with the plant manager at each facility. The PCC is appointed by the plant manager and is the point of contact for loss prevention at each location.

4.1.4 The plant manager is responsible for making sure adequate resources are available to the PCC to establish and maintain loss prevention programs and provide input to other programs as defined by this standard.

4.2 LOSS PREVENTION INSPECTION PROGRAM Novelis’ operating plants need to be inspected periodically to ensure issues that could lead to a Property or Boiler / Machinery loss are addressed in a timely manner. Each plant shall incorporate loss prevention inspection items into existing plant inspection programs (Safety inspections, security tours, predictive / preventive maintenance processes, etc.) and where this is not practical, establish plant loss prevention inspection programs to address these needs. 4.2.1 General inspection items shall be established to address the following:

- General Fire Protection / Loss Prevention inspection items – Incorporate

into EHS monthly area inspection program. - Plant tours of unoccupied areas (Incorporate into security tours)




- Flood* preparedness inspections - Incorporate into plant preventive maintenance program

- Wind storm* / Tornado* / Hurricane* preparedness inspections - Incorporate into plant preventive maintenance program

- Earthquake preparedness inspections* - Incorporate into plant preventive maintenance program

- Inadvertent water discharge from plant piping systems - Incorporate into plant preventive maintenance program.

- Inspections of high hazard processes - Incorporate into plant preventive maintenance program.

* Only required if the natural hazard is applicable at a given location.

4.3 LOSS PREVENTION - MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE Managing change at Novelis’ facilities as it relates to loss prevention is critical to the long-term insurability of Novelis’ operations worldwide and an important part of a plant’s general property conservation program. The plant-wide MOC program shall be reviewed periodically to ensure the subject of property loss prevention is adequately addressed. The insurance Technical Service Provider (TSP) of record and/or Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation shall be requested to provide input to projects with loss prevention related concerns. This program shall be established as follows: 4.3.1 It is the PCCs responsibility to ensure the TSP of record provides loss

prevention input and reviews projects prior to completion of the design phase that have scope items that fall into the general categories as listed below. It is also critical that major loss prevention scope items are defined within the project RFA process to ensure related cost are included in the project budget prior to approval.

4.3.2 This also applies to projects that modify or relocate existing facilities, processes, utilities and plant infrastructure.

4.3.3 For Greenfield and independent Brownfield projects where there is no PCC identified, the project engineer or his designee’s shall act as the project PCC.

4.3.4 The TSP or Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation shall be consulted and loss prevention recommendations solicited prior to the completion of the project planning process.

4.3.5 The broad categories of projects requiring input are listed below, These items shall be listed in the plant-wide MOC procedure as requiring input from the TSP or Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation:




4.3.5.1 Combustible construction, process components and fluids, storage or packaging materials: - Will combustible materials of construction be used?

- Are we going to store, use, handle or dispense flammable

liquids or combustible liquids or gasses?

- Will hydraulic power systems using combustible hydraulic fluid

be installed?

- Will there be process or packaging use of combustibles

(plastics, paper, pitch, etc.)?

- Are we Installing or modifying gas, fuel oil, or coal fired

systems?

- Will plastic ductwork be installed as part of this project?

- Will we create a combustible / explosible dust hazard or install /

modify a dust collection system during or as a result of the

processes installed by this project?

4.3.5.2 Important infrastructure, boilers, pressure vessels and machinery. - Are we installing or modifying existing pressure vessels on site?

- Are we installing large power / electrical distribution equipment?

- Are we installing conveyors as part of this project?

- Are we installing fume exhaust systems (including bag house,

scrubbers, precipitators, etc.)?

- Will the project involve the installation or relocation of existing

hazardous operations?

4.3.5.3 New structure or changes to existing structures, etc.

- Are we installing new roofing system or modifying existing

systems?

- Are we building new building or placing movable temporary

structure?

- Are we building or placing a room / building within an existing

building?




4.3.5.4 Modification to existing fire protection systems or new - Are we installing new or modifying an existing fire protection

system?

- Will testing of existing or new fire protection systems be

required?

- Will training of plant personnel on modifications to existing or

new fire protection systems be required?

- Will the fire protection system require approval by any local

Authority(ies) having jurisdiction?

Note: The above listing is not intended to be a complete list. List other plant-specific items Identified by plant personnel that may require TSP input.

4.3.6 The documentation submitted for TSP review shall communicate aspects of the project that relate to loss prevention issues. The plant-specific program shall list the following items that may need to be communicated to the TSP or Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation: - A project summary outlining the project’s scope of work - Amount and type of combustibles being introduced to the plant - The exposures created to existing facilities and process equipment - Possible ignition sources being introduced - Process equipment / hazards being introduced - Plant infrastructure being added - Plant building and structures being added - Fire systems (Including hydraulic calculations) - Interlocks and permissives

4.3.7 The responsibility and authority for making decisions to act or not to act on

insurance recommendations related to project and general plant modifications, rests with the plant manager: or, in the case of Greenfield and Brownfield projects, with the project manager.

4.3.8 The plant or project personnel shall respond in writing to all TSP recommendations received. Actions taken to resolve recommendations shall be documented. In the event a facility opts to not follow a recommendation or use an alternative solution, they must document their business case and decision making process. This response shall be documented and retained in the plant or project file along with the original TSP review letter.




4.3.9 All new fire protection systems and modifications to existing systems shall be reviewed and approved by the TSP of record. Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation shall approve all fire protection systems that do not meet TSP recommended performance criteria or design criteria inconsistent with applicable codes and standards and Novelis Fire Protection Engineering standards.

4.4 INSPECTION TESTING AND MAINTENANCE (ITM) OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

4.4.1 All fire protection systems shall be inspected tested and maintained to ensure they are operational at all times and in accordance with applicable codes and standards. A site-specific program shall be established to define the activities that are required for all fire protection systems and equipment at a given plant. This program shall be established as follows: 4.4.1.1 The PCC shall be the Novelis Responsible Person (NRP) for the

inspection, testing and maintenance of fire protection systems and equipment. While other plant personnel or groups may actually perform this work, it is the responsibility of the PCC to ensure that fire protection systems and equipment are operational and properly maintained and that all identified corrective actions are tracked through to completion. The loss prevention coordinator is the local authority having jurisdiction with respect to code and standards as they relate to fire protection systems at the plant.

4.4.1.2 The specific testing performed shall be summarized as to the scope of the ITM and the frequency that each item is performed in a summary document that can be periodically reviewed by the TSP

4.4.1.3 The testing of fire systems and equipment that is witnessed by TSP personnel during loss prevention surveys is meant to verify proper system operation for insurance purposes and may not include all testing, etc. required. However the testing that is performed during a loss prevention inspection can be used to meet the site-specific ITM program requirements for that period of time.

4.4.1.4 The PCC shall maintain this program and related summary document up-to-date at all times. When new systems and equipment are added or removed from the plant, personnel changes are made or new service contracts are created, the program summary document shall be updated to reflect these changes. At a minimum, the program summary document shall be




reviewed and updated on a yearly basis.

4.4.1.5 All fire systems and equipment shall be functionally tested after modifications, repairs or maintenance to ensure that they will operate as designed.

4.4.1.6 All inspection, testing and maintenance of fire protection systems and equipment shall be adequately documented and files maintained on site by the PCC or his designee. The documentation shall be such that scope and frequency of ITM tasks can be identified and reviewed against the ITM Program Summary Document.

4.5 PROTECTION SYSTEM IMPAIRMENT HANDLING 4.5.1 All Novelis operating plants shall have a process in place to monitor and track

all impairments to protection systems regardless of how long the impairment lasts. Additionally, all impairments exceeding 8 hours in duration at our operating facilities are required to be monitored by a third party (TSP of record). The TSP monitors the impairment to ensure adequate compensatory measures are in place during the impairment and that timely restoration of service takes place. A written site-specific management program shall be established to track all impairments regardless of their duration, through to the clearing of the impairment as follows:

4.5.2 The Property Conservation Coordinator is responsible for ensuring all fire protection systems at a given plant are operational at all times. He is also responsible for ensuring that when impairments to these systems do occur, these impairments are monitored through to the system’s return to service, that the TSP is involved when required and that each impairment is adequately documented and records are filed for future review.

4.5.3 Each facility shall develop a site-specific impairment handling procedure that is used to identify, monitor and document each impairment that occurs at a given Novelis facility. The procedure shall consist of the following: - The impairment notification process description - The tags or forms used to monitor the impairment - The safety and property loss prevention actions required to be taken

during an impairment. - The third party (TSP) monitoring and notification processes, phone

number and TSP contact information.




4.5.4 All completed impairment tags or forms shall be maintained on site for a minimum of one year after the impairment.

4.5.5 Systems no longer required for protection may be maintained in a state of permanent impairment if a written risk analysis is performed and reviewed by the TSP or by Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation (CMPC). The documentation of the decision making process shall be maintained on site for all permanent impairments.

4.5.6 The following general requirements shall be incorporated into the site specific program: - Limit the frequency, extent and duration of all impairments (Expedite

repairs to critical protection systems) - Work continuously on impaired equipment until it is restored to service - Reduce the possibility of fire or explosion during the impairment by

shutting down hazardous processes - Establish special operating procedures for plant activities / processes - Enhance surveillance and firefighting capability during the impairment - Restore all fire protection systems promptly after the impairment - Verify by appropriate testing that all fire protection systems have been

restored to proper system operation.

4.5.7 At a minimum, the site-specific program shall identify the following compensatory actions that can be taken to ensure an acceptable level of loss prevention during an impairment: - Notification of the local Fire Department or plant fire brigade personnel. - Notification to security personnel. - Notification to the Central Service Alarm Company (the one receiving your

alarms). - Notification to contractors working on-site in the area of the impairment. - Prohibit any activity (including hazardous processes) or work in the area

of the impairment presenting a fire hazard, including hot work, during the duration of the impairment.

- Prohibit smoking in the affected area. - Organize hourly safety rounds during the impairment (Not required if area

is constantly attended.) - Ensure that all manual fire fighting equipment (portable extinguishers,

hose connections, hydrants) is operational and that hoses are in good condition and available and/or connected to the hydrants in the area.

- If a sprinkler system that is to be impaired can be fed from another source using a temporary connection (often using a hose connected to the 2”




drain of the control system or fire department connection), this should be done.

4.5.8 The site-specific program shall list examples of impairments to fire systems,

including, but not limited to: - Closed fire protection underground sectional valves.* - Shut control valve on a sprinkler system or other fire protection system. - Pipe break on a normally dry pipe fire protection system (Deluge, CO2,

FM 200, Etc.).

- Faults / trouble condition in a protection systems (i.e. CO2 detection systems, alarm systems, clean agent extinguishing systems)*.

- Disabled interlock or permissive circuit. - Blocked, damaged or inoperative fire door.* - Fire pump in off position or other condition that would prevent a fire pump

from automatically operating (Low battery power level, low fuel level in storage tank(< ¾ full), lack of cooling water, etc.).

- Low water level in a fire protection water storage tank (Below ¾ full). - Blocked, inaccessible or inoperable hydrant or other component of a fire

protection system.* * Where the noted condition would result in the system not performing its intended purpose, delayed operation or limited effectiveness.

4.6 LOSS PREVENTION RECOMMENDATION RESPONSE AND RESOLUTION 4.6.1 Each facility shall establish a site-specific procedure to ensure that all

recommendations that result from TSP or Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation loss prevention survey inspections are responded to in a timely manner. This program shall be established as follows:

4.6.2 The Property Conservation Coordinator is responsible for ensuring that all loss prevention survey recommendations are responded to in a timely manner.

4.6.3 The site-specific program shall require that all TSP / Novelis reports be responded to in writing no later than 45 days after the receipt of the report at the plant.

4.6.4 The program shall require that each recommendation have a written action plan, that an SPA be identified and that an estimated completion date be established. This information shall be documented in the EHS SharePoint site: http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/EHS/pages/propertyloss.aspx




4.6.5 The site-specific program shall set a frequency at which the plant’s response will be reviewed by the PCC and updated. Recommended by NOVELIS every 6 months.

4.6.6 It is the plant manager’s option to accept or decline implementation of TSP and Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation recommendations. When a loss prevention recommendation is declined, it shall be documented through a risk assessment. All loss estimates (Property Damage and Business Interruption) used in these risk assessments shall be developed with the participation of the TSP and be based upon PML type loss scenarios. The plant response shall document the risk assessment process and rational for “No Action” or “Alternative Action” decisions. See attachment for process flow chart.

4.7 LOSS REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION 4.7.1 Reporting of events is necessary to collect data on the frequency of events

that could lead to material events and losses that exceed out deductibles. Evaluation of this leading indicator helps risk management and corporate loss prevention better understand our risk exposures and corresponding need for risk control measures. Each operating plant shall report, investigate and act on all recommendations to prevent recurrence.

4.7.2 All events that occur at a Novelis facility that fall into the following broad categories shall be reported to the Corporate Insurance and Risk Management Department within 48 hours of the incident: - Property damage and business interruption in excess of $50,000,

including machinery losses (or any of the following) - Activation of the emergency action plan / plant evacuation - Activation of a fire alarm system (Non-false alarm) - Activation of a fire extinguishing system (Non-false alarm) - Explosion or fire involving combustible dusts - Use of two or more fire extinguishers or a hose station to extinguish a fire - Utility interruption over 8 hours or where a significant impact to production

has occurred - Other unusual event (Explosion, Tornado, Flood, etc.) that results in

damage to equipment or significant impact to production or other operations

4.7.3 All events shall be investigated by the PCC and recommendations identified shall be documented and followed through to completion.




4.8 EMERGENCY RESPONSE AND ACTION PLANS (Address Property and Boiler

Machinery Loss Issues) 4.8.1 It is important that our plants determine the types of loss events that could

occur and then work to address these same events in their emergency action plan. While the general mandatory requirement for the emergency action plan are established in EHS mandated standards, this Standard outlines the plan requirements needed to adequately address loss prevention and property conservation issues. While we can’t prevent many of these events, we can minimize our exposure to them and limit the damage that occurs by adequately preparing for and quickly / safely responding to these events.

4.8.2 The emergency response and action plan at each operating plant shall address all natural perils and other property loss events “that could likely occur” at a given location, including but not limited to: - Earthquakes / Tsunamis / Volcanic Eruptions - Windstorm / Hurricanes / Cyclones / Typhoons / Tornados - Lightning - Hail - Fires / Explosions - Terrorist Attack / Bomb Threat - Floods / Landslides - Roof failures - Freezing Weather - Winter Storm or Blizzards - Sink holes and Landslides - Dike and dam failures - Brush fires

4.8.3 The plan shall address the fight or flight fire response from plant personnel.

The type of response selected shall be coordinated with the site-specific employee training programs.

4.8.4 The plan shall address employee actions, stock piling of supplies and other emergency resources to safely limit continuing damage to the greatest extend practical following a loss event.

4.8.5 The plan shall address the safe shutdown of plant utilities, process and infrastructure type equipment where the shutdown of same is necessary to facilitate emergency response activities to limit loss of life or property.




4.9 Hot Work Cutting and Welding Program (Address Property Loss Issues) Control of welding and other portable ignition sources (Hot work) is a key component of Novelis’ plant-based loss prevention program. The plant-based program shall be in accordance with Novelis Engineering Standard NVLFPES 16 “Hot Work Program”

o NVLFPES16 - Hot Work Program

4.9.1 Written procedures must be established to ensure that ignition sources are controlled and adequately separated from combustibles whenever hot work is being performed.

4.9.2 A plant-based permitting system shall be established to govern hot work at all operating plants. The plant-based program shall require the following: - A pre hot work hazard assessment of the immediate work area and

adjacent areas - Signed permit at the hot work site - Dedicated fire extinguisher at the hot work site - Fire watch at the hot work site - Review of hot work site for a minimum of 4 hours after hot work has been

completed - Management approval for hot work in High Hazard areas of the plant

4.9.3 The approval process shall be hierarchical in nature and require progressively

higher / multiple levels of approval as the risk increases to plant personnel, processes, buildings and plant infrastructure. For high hazard areas or where critical plant processes are at risk, the plant manager or his designee (Property Conservation Coordinator) shall provide his approval.

4.9.4 Rules shall be established to manage both the establishment, hot work, periodic inspection and recertification, of designated, no permit required,hot work areas. The location of these areas shall be documented and signs shall be placed in the immediate area. Designated areas shall be limited in size and shall not be located in important structures, near critical processes or near high hazard areas of the plant.

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES16%20-%20Hot%20Work%20Program.pdf




4.10 Flammable and Combustible Liquids and Gases Program

4.10.1 The use, handling and storage of flammable and combustible liquids and Gasses should be minimized to the greatest extent practical. At a minimum flammable and combustible liquids and gasses should be used, stored or handled in accordance with Novelis’ Engineering Standards: - NVLFPES02 - Cold Mill Fire Protection Standard - NVLFPES03 - Hot Mill Fire Protection Standard - NVLFPES09 - Flammable Liquids - NVLFPES12 - Printing, Lacquering, and Laminating - NVLFPES15 - Hydraulic Systems - NVLFPES22 - Transformers and Oil-Filled Equipment - NVLFPES27 - Compressed Gases in Cylinders

4.10.2 Where flammable and combustible liquids and Gasses must be used, strict

controls shall be established to ensure they are separated from possible ignition sources so as to prevent ignition of vapors and gases.

4.10.3 The PCC shall have on-site up to date copies of all written regulations, codes and standards that are enforceable at his / her location. Where none exist NFPA codes and standards shall be used as guidance.

4.10.4 Where flammable liquids or combustible liquids or gases are being used or stored, site / building / equipment specific documentation shall be on file showing compliance with all applicable requirements.

4.10.5 Systems using flammable and combustible liquid or gases shall be Inspected, tested and maintained in such a way as to minimize the probability of release and or ignition of vapor or gas

4.10.6 Operating and process procedures shall be in place to prevent the release and or ignition of vapor or gas. All process upsets, near misses, and losses involving flammable and combustible liquids shall be investigated by the PCC, documented and all recommendations followed through to completion.

4.10.7 All hydraulic systems should follow NVLFPES15 “Hydraulic Systems”.

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES02%20-%20Novelis%20Cold%20Mill%20Fire%20Protection%20Standard.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES03%20-%20Novelis%20Hot%20Mill%20Fire%20Protection%20Standard.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES09%20-%20Flammable%20and%20Combsutible%20Liquids.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES12%20-%20PRINTING%2C%20LACQUERING%20AND%20LAMINATING.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES15%20-%20Hydraulic%20Fluids%20and%20Systems.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES22%20-%20TRANSFORMERS%20AND%20OIL-FILLED%20EQUIPMENT.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES27%20-%20Compressed%20Gases%20in%20Cylinders.pdf?Web=1





4.11 Other Loss Prevention Concerns

4.11.1 The PCC shall work to ensure that other plant operations, facilities and processes that represent a significant risk exposure at our operating plants are adequately addresses to minimize risk to personnel and the facility. These concerns can include but are not limited to the following: 4.11.1.1 Smoking Policy – Each plant shall have in place a smoke policy

that controls the fire risk of smoking. Designated smoking areas shall be established and periodically inspected. The policy shall also address visitors (truck drivers, contract workers, etc.) to the plant. Smoking areas will have proper signage as well as high hazard areas of the plant. Training shall be provide to ensure all persons entering our plants are informed of the policy.

4.11.1.2 Mobile Equipment - use of combustible fuels (propane, diesel or gas) and combustible hydraulic fluids. Electric powered equipment is also a concern due to the battery storage and charging areas. See Novelis EHS Performance Standard - Mobile Equipment and Pedestrian Safety.

4.11.1.3 Hazardous Materials Assessment and Sampling - Address fire and explosion hazards associated with the generation, collection / deposits and handling of combustible dust and fines. See Novelis’ standards:

- NVLFPES28 – Combustible Dust

4.11.1.4 Fuel Gas Systems and Utilization Equipment - Use, storage and conveying of fuel gases. All combustion safeguards systems shall be in accordance with NFPA 86 or other local nation standards or regulations in the country the plant is located. Where meeting NFPA 86 is in excess of local standards, then the requirements of NFPA 86 should be met.

4.11.1.5 Fired and Unfired Pressure Vessels – See item above. The use, inspection and testing of this type of equipment to often governed by local codes, standards and regulations. Programs must be developed to ensure the safe use of this class of equipment.

4.11.1.6 Molten Metal / Water Explosion Hazards - Ensure that key safeguards are in-place to prevent molten aluminum from contacting water or damp surfaces / tools or damp charging metal.

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES28%20-%20Combustible%20Dust%20Standard.pdf?Web=1


http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES28-Clean-up of Combustible Dusts.pdf




Metal (Scrap, ingot butts, sows, alloying metal, etc.) can also be a source of water. Each plant needs to have a comprehensive program to control these risks.

4.11.1.7 Power Supply and Distribution Equipment – Power transformers and other mission critical electrical equipment represent both a fire risk and major business interruption risk. Implement risk reduction measures to safe guard this critical infrastructure at all operating plants. It is not acceptable to just run this equipment to failure. Programs shall be established and non-destructive testing performed in an effort to detect and rectify operating concerns prior to equipment failure. 4.11.1.7.1 Electrical equipment rooms shall be separated from other

hazard areas by fire walls (Minimum of 2-hour rated). All cable penetrations and other openings shall be sealed using fire penetration seals or fire dampers.

4.11.1.7.2 Where cable coatings are used as a primary method of protection for electrical cable at a plant site, these coatings shall be installed in all important electrical rooms including additional coating when new cables are installed.

4.11.1.7.3 No piping conveying flammable or combustible liquids or gases shall be routed through electrical rooms.

4.11.1.7.4 Combustible storage in electrical equipment rooms should be stored in metal cabinets and limited to the items required to service equipment in the room.

4.11.1.7.5 Electrical equipment rooms should not be allowed to be used as break rooms, meeting rooms, locker rooms, etc. or for any other purpose other than their original intended purpose.

4.11.1.7.6 Applicable Standards are as follows:

o NVLFPES04 – Motor Control Centers o NVLFPES05 – Electrical Cables

o NVLFPES06 – Computer and Process Control Rooms

o NVLFPES20 - Fire Alarm and Detection System

o NVLFPES21 – Halon Replacement

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES04%20-%20MOTOR%20CONTROL%20CENTRES.pdf?Web=1




http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES06%20-%20COMPUTER%20and%20PROCESS%20CONTROL%20ROOMS.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES20%20-%20Fire%20Alarm%20and%20Detection%20System.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES21%20-%20HALON%20REPLACEMENT.pdf?Web=1

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES04 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES.pdf


http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES05 - ELECTRICAL CABLES.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES21 - HALON REPLACEMENT.pdf




o NVLFPES22 - Transformers and Oil-Filled Equipment

o NVLFPES23 - Offices

4.11.1.8 Machinery and Equipment – Mechanical process equipment is critical to Novelis being a reliable supplier of goods to our customers. Our ability to predict and prevent equipment failures is key to preventing process interruptions and other plant outages that could result in insurance claims and interruption of product supply to our customers. 4.11.1.8.1 Non-destructive testing shall also be performed in an

effort to detect and rectify operating concerns prior to equipment / process failures.

4.11.1.8.2 The following is a typical list of programs our insurance underwriters look for Novelis to have in place at our operating plants: 4.11.1.8.2.1 Critical spare parts 4.11.1.8.2.2 Infrared survey of electrical equipment 4.11.1.8.2.3 Transformer oil testing 4.11.1.8.2.4 Gear and lube oil testing 4.11.1.8.2.5 Electrical equipment testing frequencies 4.11.1.8.2.6 Contingency planning (For process

bottlenecks and to address concerns with limited sparing)

4.11.1.8.3 Applicable Documents are as follow:

o NVLMEIG 01 - Gears Inspection and Maintenance Guideline

o NVLMEIG 02 - Vibration Monitoring Program Guideline

o NVLMEIG 03 - Novelis Electrical Equipment Inspection and

Maintenance Guideline

o NVLMEIG 04 - Transformers Inspection and Maintenance

Guideline

5.0 TRAINING

5.1 The PCC shall be knowledgeable of the general principals of loss prevention as they

relate to this Standard’s subject areas. Training opportunities are limited. The TSP

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Prevention/Standards%20and%20Guidelines/Fire%20Protection%20Engineering%20Standards/English/NVLFPES22%20-%20TRANSFORMERS%20AND%20OIL-FILLED%20EQUIPMENT.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Prevention/Standards%20and%20Guidelines/Fire%20Protection%20Engineering%20Standards/English/NVLFPES22%20-%20TRANSFORMERS%20AND%20OIL-FILLED%20EQUIPMENT.pdf

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES23%20-%20OFFICES.pdf?Web=1


http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/4.%20Reliability/NVLMEIG01%20-%20Gears%20Inspection%20and%20Maintenance.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/4.%20Reliability/NVLMEIG02%20-%20Vibration%20Monitoring%20Program.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/4.%20Reliability/NVLMEIG03%20-%20Novelis%20Electrical%20Equipment%20Inspection%20and%20Maintenance.pdf?Web=1


http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/4.%20Reliability/NVLMEIG04%20-%20Transformers%20Inspection%20and%20Maintenance.pdf?Web=1


http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES22 - TRANSFORMERS AND OIL-FILLED EQUIPMENT.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES23 - OFFICES.pdf




and Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation are in most cases the only resource available to expand the PCC’s knowledge base.

5.2 Training modules have been developed by Novelis for use by the PCC to learn about the different management programs and risks that need to be managed on a day-to-day basis. Whenever a plant assigns a new PCC, these training modules should be mandatory reading. Novelis’ Corporate Manager, Property Conservation is always available to answer questions.

5.3 Personnel involved in fire protection system maintenance shall be knowledgeable of the system’s operating principles, design requirements, system components and inspection, testing & maintenance requirements of all systems they are responsible for.

5.4 The general plant population shall be informed of the existence and general scope of the loss prevention programs covered by this Standard. This shall be accomplished at time of employment and biannually thereafter.

5.5 More specific training shall be provided for plant personnel that work day-in-and-day-out in potentially hazardous areas of the plant.

6.0 REFERENCES

Novelis Reference Documents Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standards

NVLFPES01 - General Loss Prevention NVLFPES02 - Cold Mill Fire Protection Standard NVLFPES03 - Hot Mill Fire Protection Standard NVLFPES04 – Motor Control Centers NVLFPES05 – Electrical Cables NVLFPES06 – Computer and Process Control Rooms NVLFPES07 - DELETED NVLFPES08 - Vehicle Repair and Storage Garages NVLFPES09 - Flammable Liquids NVLFPES10 - Conveyor Belts NVLFPES11 - General Storage NVLFPES12 - Printing, Lacquering, and Laminating NVLFPES13 - Fire Protection Water Supplies NVLFPES14 - General Manufacturing Plants

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Prevention/Standards%20and%20Guidelines/Fire%20Protection%20Engineering%20Standards/English/NVLFPES01%20-%20COLD%20MILLS%20AND%20FOIL%20MILLS.pdf

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES02%20-%20Novelis%20Cold%20Mill%20Fire%20Protection%20Standard.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES03%20-%20Novelis%20Hot%20Mill%20Fire%20Protection%20Standard.pdf?Web=1



http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES05%20-%20ELECTRICAL%20CABLES.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES06%20-%20COMPUTER%20and%20PROCESS%20CONTROL%20ROOMS.pdf?Web=1

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Prevention/Standards%20and%20Guidelines/Fire%20Protection%20Engineering%20Standards/English/NVLFPES07%20-EXTRUSION%20PRESSES.pdf

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES08%20-%20VEHICLE%20REPAIR%20AND%20STORAGE%20GARAGES.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES09%20-%20Flammable%20and%20Combsutible%20Liquids.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES10%20-%20Conveyor%20Belts.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES11%20-%20GENERAL%20STORAGE.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES12%20-%20PRINTING%2C%20LACQUERING%20AND%20LAMINATING.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES13%20-%20Fire%20Protection%20Water%20Supplies.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES14%20-%20General%20Manufacturing%20Plants.pdf?Web=1

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES01 - COLD MILLS AND FOIL MILLS.pdf


http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES05 - ELECTRICAL CABLES.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES07 -EXTRUSION PRESSES.pdf




NVLFPES15 - Hydraulic Systems NVLFPES16 - Hot Work Program NVLFPES17 - Fire Prevention and Equipment Inspections NVLFPES18 - Plant Fire Brigades NVLFPES19 - Project Loss Prevention Management of Change NVLFPES20 - Fire Alarm and Detection System NVLFPES21 – Halon Replacement NVLFPES22 - Transformers and Oil-Filled Equipment NVLFPES23 - Offices NVLFPES24 - Construction Sites NVLFPES25 - Fire System Commissioning NVLFPES26 - DELETED NVLFPES27 - Compressed Gases in Cylinders NVLFPES28 - Combustible Dust

Fire Protection Engineering Guidelines NVLFPG 01- Printing, Coating, Lacquering and Laminating Line Ovens - Explosion

Mitigation Guideline

Mechanical and Electrical Integrity Guidelines NVLMEIG 01 - Gears Inspection and Maintenance Guideline NVLMEIG 02 - Vibration Monitoring Program Guideline NVLMEIG 03 - Novelis Electrical Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Guideline NVLMEIG 04 - Transformers Inspection and Maintenance Guideline

Novelis Loss Prevention Bulletins

Best Practice Document BP-001-2012 - Computer Room Sprinkler Design Basis BP-001A-2012 - EEI Sprinkler Head Leakage BP-001A-2012 - MM Protecting Computer Equipment BP-001A-2012 - Protecting Computer Facilities BP-002-2012 - Critical Electrical Room Best Practice BP-003-2012 - Sprinklers Protecting Process Equipment BP-004-2012 - Hose Stations Hazard Alert Document HA-001-2011 - Passive Protection Loss Alert Documents LA-001-2011 - Fairmont Annealing Oven Exp


http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES16%20-%20Hot%20Work%20Program.pdf

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES17%20-%20Fire%20Prevention%20and%20Equipment%20Inspections.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES18%20-%20Plant%20Fire%20Brigades%20.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES19%20-%20Project%20Loss%20Prevention%20Management%20of%20Change.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES20%20-%20Fire%20Alarm%20and%20Detection%20System.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES21%20-%20HALON%20REPLACEMENT.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES22%20-%20TRANSFORMERS%20AND%20OIL-FILLED%20EQUIPMENT.pdf?Web=1



http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES24%20-%20Construction%20Sites.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES25%20-%20Fire%20System%20Commissioning.pdf?Web=1

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Prevention/Standards%20and%20Guidelines/Fire%20Protection%20Engineering%20Standards/English/NVLFPES07%20-EXTRUSION%20PRESSES.pdf

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/3.%20Fire%20Protection/Loss%20Prevention%20-%20English%20Documents/NVLFPES27%20-%20Compressed%20Gases%20in%20Cylinders.pdf?Web=1


http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Prevention/Standards%20and%20Guidelines/Engineering%20Guidelines/Fire%20and%20Explosion%20Prevention%20and%20Protection%20Guidelines/Printing,%20Coating,%20Lacquering%20and%20Laminating%20Line%20Ovens%20-%20Explosion%20Mitigation%20Guideline%20.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Prevention/Standards%20and%20Guidelines/Engineering%20Guidelines/Fire%20and%20Explosion%20Prevention%20and%20Protection%20Guidelines/Printing,%20Coating,%20Lacquering%20and%20Laminating%20Line%20Ovens%20-%20Explosion%20Mitigation%20Guideline%20.pdf

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/4.%20Reliability/NVLMEIG01%20-%20Gears%20Inspection%20and%20Maintenance.pdf?Web=1

http://teams.insidenovelis.com/rt/sites/GERA/Knowledge%20Center/4.%20Reliability/NVLMEIG02%20-%20Vibration%20Monitoring%20Program.pdf?Web=1



http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/BP-001-2012%20Computer%20Room%20Sprinkler%20Design%20Basis.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/BP-001A-2012%20-%20EEI%20Sprinkler%20Head%20Leakage.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/BP-001A-2012%20-%20MM%20Protecting%20Computer%20Equip.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/BP-001A-2012%20-%20Protecting%20Computer%20facilities.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/BP-002-2012%20Critical%20Electrical%20Rm%20Best%20Practice.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/BP-003-2012%20Sprinklers%20Protecting%20Process%20Equip.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/BP-004-2012%20-%20Hose%20Stations.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/HA-001-2011%20%20Passive%20Protection.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/LA-001-2011%20%20Fairmont%20Annealing%20Oven%20Exp.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES21 - HALON REPLACEMENT.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES23 - OFFICES.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared Documents/Property Loss Prevention/Standards and Guidelines/Fire Protection Engineering Standards/English/NVLFPES07 -EXTRUSION PRESSES.pdf




PLB 2008-01 - Gearbox Failures PLB 2008-02 - Baghouse Fire at Latchford PLB 2008-03 - Cold Mill Fire at Alunorf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/PLB%202008-01%20-%20Gearbox%20Failures.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/PLB%202008-02%20-%20Baghouse%20Fire%20at%20Latchford.pdf

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/insurance/Shared%20Documents/Property%20Loss%20Bulletin/PLB%202008-03%20-%20Cold%20Mill%20Fire%20at%20Alunorf.pdf

FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERING STANDARDS Global Insurance and Risk Management Department

ELECTRICAL CABLES – 05

1.0 SCOPE This Standard details the fire protection measures that shall be provided for all new

and existing installations of electrical cables with combustible insulation. 2.0 HAZARD Electrical cables with non-metallic exterior covering, when grouped together in trays,

troughs or raceways, present a serious fire hazard. Causes of cable fires include insulation failure for various reasons; improper installation, poor connections, termi-nations and splices, and exposure to fires originating in other combustibles. Cable fires, particularly those involving vertical configurations, grow rapidly and generate large volumes of toxic smoke making fire-fighting extremely difficult. Some cable in-sulation materials are more "fire retardant" than others. However, all thermoplastic or thermosetting cable insulation, including the low flame spread - low gas emission (LFS-LGE) type, will support combustion to varying degrees.

3.0 GENERAL The requirements of this section apply to all cable tray installations regardless of

location. 3.1 Fire Stopping of Penetrations 3.1.1 Regardless of the number of cables, anywhere single or multiple

cable trays penetrate walls, floors or ceilings, fire stopping of the opening shall be provided.

3.1.2 The fire stopping shall provide the same fire resistance rating as the

construction assembly through which the cables pass. 3.1.3 Only fire stopping methods and materials approved for such use by

recognized testing laboratories shall be used. 3.2 Cable Tray Installations The requirements of 3.2 shall apply to new installations only. 3.2.1 Cables shall be installed in trays in accordance with the requirements

of National Fire Protection Association Standard 70, National Electri-cal Code.

3.2.2. Where local statutory requirements are different than those of the

National Electrical Code, the statutory requirements shall take prece-dence.

05 - 1 Revision: August 2007



3.2.3 Cable tray installations with the following types of cable shall be

exempt from the requirements for fire retardant coating or automatic sprinklers in 4.1 to 4.4: Mineral insulated (MI), metal-sheathed (MI), metal clad (MC) and Factory Mutual Group I specification tested ca-ble.

3.2.4 Power cables shall be installed in trays separate from control, signal,

and instrument wiring. 3.2.5 Trays stacked one above the other and having cables of different

voltages should be stacked in descending order. Control, signal and instrument wiring should be in the lowest tray.

4.0 FIRE PROTECTION Cables with combustible insulation will be found in every plant. The fire hazard is a

function of many variables, including cable type, voltage, age, quantity and ar-rangement. The financial risk associated with each potential cable fire will vary with each situation. Consequently, the following requirements cannot foresee every situation. In each case, the risks must be assessed, particularly those of the conse-quential interruption to production. The following subsections address the most commonly found situations.

4.1 Tunnels 4.1.1 This subsection applies to all below grade tunnels and large trenches,

regardless of the dimensions, in which electrical cables are located. It is difficult to differentiate between a "tunnel" and a large cable

"trench" which is not high enough for persons to move about without removing cover plates. Such trenches can contain large numbers of cables and present the same fire hazards as tunnels.

4.1.2 All tunnels shall be equipped with photoelectric or linear beam type

smoke detection throughout and installed in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, Fire Alarm and Detection Sys-tems - 20.

4.1.3 Where high air velocities or environmental conditions will render

photoelectric smoke detection unreliable or ineffective, the installation of linear beam detection is not possible, and all cables are not coated over their entire length with an approved fire retardant coating, linear heat detection shall be installed in all cable trays.




4.1.4 All intersections between main and subsidiary tunnels shall be pro-vided with 1½ hour, fire-rated cut-offs. The doors may be normally open and equipped with individual, smoke detector activated, auto-matic closing devices. The system shall be arranged to close all doors upon activation of the cable tunnel detection system.

4.1.5 Individual tunnels in excess of 60 m (200 ft.) in length and in which all

cables are not coated over their entire length with an approved fire re-tardant coating shall be subdivided into sections of not more than 60 m (200 ft.), by 1½ hour, fire-rated cut-offs as described in 4.1.4.

4.1.6 In tunnels used as a means of air supply to other areas, supply and

exhaust fans shall be arranged to shut down automatically on activa-tion of any fire suppression or detection system in any portion of the tunnel system.

4.1.7 Means shall be provided so as to be able to remove smoke from

tunnels without exposing electrical switchgear and motors in intercon-nected areas to corrosive gases as would result from using the nor-mal ventilation system for smoke removal.

4.1.8 Where there is one cable tray on one side only or one cable tray on

each side of the tunnel, no additional protection other than that re-quired in 4.1.1 through 4.1.7 shall be provided.

4.1.9 Where there are two or three cable trays on one side of the tunnel, all

cables shall be coated over their entire length with an approved, fire retardant coating or an automatic sprinkler system with quick re-sponse directional heads shall be installed. Where sprinklers are in-stalled, "fire breaks" shall be provided every 15 m (50 ft.). "Fire breaks" shall consist of a 2 m (6.6 ft.) section of all cables being coated with an approved fire retardant coating.

Quick response sprinklers are similar to standard sprinklers except

that the heat-actuated element operates faster. 4.1.10 Where there are four or more cable trays, regardless of configuration,

all cables shall be coated over their entire length with an approved fire retardant coating or an automatic, open head water spray system shall be installed.

4.1.11 The water spray system (4.1.10) shall be activated by a cross-zoned

smoke detection system or single zone linear heat detection system cross-zoned with smoke detection. This fire detection system shall meet the requirement of 4.1.2.




4.1.12 The length of each water spray system zone shall not exceed 60 m

(200 ft.). Opposite sides of fire-rated cut-offs (4.1.5) shall be pro-tected by separate water spray systems.

4.2 Process Control Rooms, Computer Rooms and Motor Control Centres 4.2.1 Cables in Process Control, Computer and Cable Spreading Rooms,

and Motor Control Centres shall be protected in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standards, Motor Control Cen-tres - 04 and Computer and Process Control Rooms - 06.

4.3 Plant Production Areas 4.3.1 General Cables shall be routed so as not to be exposed to a fire from beneath

(e.g. above a rolling mill), physical damage from falling objects, mol-ten metal spills, hot work sparks, accumulations of waste material, combustible dust and flammable liquid leaks.

4.3.2 Areas Protected by Ceiling Sprinklers

4.3.2.1 In areas protected by ceiling level sprinklers, cable trays shall be installed within the unobstructed discharge pattern of sprinklers.

4.3.2.2 Cable trays shall be located from 1 m to 3 m (3 - 10 ft.)

beneath ceiling sprinklers. 4.3.2.3 Where two or three trays are vertically stacked, "fire breaks",

as defined in 4.1.9, shall be provided every 15 m (50 ft.). 4.3.2.4 Where four or more trays are vertically stacked, "fire breaks"

as defined in 4.1.9 shall be installed. In addition, one line of quick response directional sprinklers shall be installed directly above the top cable tray. These sprinklers shall be provided with shields to deflect water from ceiling sprinklers away from the tray sprinklers so as not to delay operation of the latter.

4.3.2.5 In areas where cables are exposed to severe fire hazards (i.e.

flammable liquids in basements), it may be necessary when electrical system continuity is critical, to coat all cables with an approved fire retardant coating in addition to providing sprin-klers, regardless of the number and arrangement of cables.




4.3.3 Areas not Protected by Ceiling Sprinklers 4.3.3.1 In areas without ceiling level sprinkler protection, where two or

less cable trays are vertically stacked, "fire breaks" as defined in 4.1.9 shall be installed every 7.5 m (25 ft.).

4.3.3.2 In areas with three or more vertically stacked cable trays, all

cables shall be coated with an approved, fire retardant coating; or one line of quick response directional sprinklers shall be in-stalled directly above the top cable tray. Where sprinklers are used, "fire breaks" as defined in 4.1.9 shall be installed every 15 m (50 ft.).

4.4 Vertical Shafts 4.4.1 Where a single tray is in a vertical configuration without intervening

floors, "fire breaks" as defined in 4.1.9 shall be installed every 4.6 m (15 ft.).

4.4.2 Where two or more trays are arranged front-to-back or side-by-side in

a vertical configuration, all cables shall be coated over their entire length with an approved fire retardant coating.

4.5 Cables Supplying Electric Fire Pumps 4.5.1 Cables supplying plant fire pumps shall not be run in trays with other

cables.

4.5.2 Cables supplying plant fire pumps shall not be run through the fire area that is being protected by the fire pump.



NVLFPES – 20 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS Revised January 18, 2016


Revision Date: January 18, 2016 Page 1

1.0 SCOPE AND APPLICATION 1.1 This Standard details the requirements for fire alarm systems in new and existing plants

and office buildings. It addresses only the need for evacuation alarms and systems for monitoring signals from fire protection systems. Requirements for provision of smoke and heat detectors will be found in other Standards. Requirements for their connection to plant fire alarm systems will be found in this Standard.

1.2 This standard applies to Greenfield and Brownfield projects, in addition to other Manage-ment of Change (MOC) processes at existing operating plants.

1.3 Where there is a conflict with this standard and another applicable standard, the most strin-gent requirement shall apply. In the event that the content of this standard conflicts with a local regulation, the local regulation shall be met.

2.0 DEFINITIONS 2.1 CMPC - Corporate Manager, Property Conservation manages Novelis’ boiler / machinery

and property loss prevention programs worldwide. Subject to the approval of Novelis' Ex-ecutive Management, CMPC develops and administers corporate policy on loss prevention processes for Novelis.

2.2 EPCM - Engineering, Procurement, Construction Management, is a common form of con-tracting arrangement within the construction industry. In an EPCM arrangement, the client, in order to involve an experienced player in large projects, selects an EPCM contractor who primarily manages the entire project on behalf of the client. The EPCM contractor essen-tially ensures the project is completed as required and on time. (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/EPCM)

2.3 FEL – Front - End Loading - Robust planning and design early in a project's lifecycle (i.e., the front end of a project), at a time when the ability to influence changes in de-sign is rela-tively high and the cost to make those changes is relatively low. It typically applies to indus-tries with highly capital intensive, long lifecycle. The process often adds a small amount of cost to a project and uses a stage-gate process, whereby a project must pass through for-mal gates at well-defined mile-stones within the project's lifecycle before receiving funding to proceed to the next stage of work. FEL Stages - It is common industry practice to divide Front-End-Loading activities in-to three stages:

NVLFPES – 20 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS



(i) FEL-1 Conceptual Stage (ii) FEL-2 Definitive Feasibility Study (iii) FEL-3 Front-End Engineering and Design (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Front-end_loading)

2.4 FMG – Factory Mutual Global is a US based insurance company, with offices world-wide, that specializes in loss prevention services primarily to large corporations throughout the world in the Highly Protected Risk (HPR) property insurance market sector. "FM Global" is the communicative name of the company, whereas the legal name is "Factory Mutual In-surance Company" (Wikimedia).

2.5 HPR – Highly Protected Risk, this term is used to describe plants that have redundant lev-els of fire protection systems and management programs in place to minimize the risk of loss at the plant. HPR facilities typically do not rely on one level of protection to address risk but rather establish a layered risk control approach to manage risk at an acceptable level. HPR facilities have very few insurance recommendations on the TSP loss prevention survey and work hard to resolve the items identified in a timely manner and as resources are made available.

2.6 MOC – Management of Change is a robust set of policies and procedures used to en-sure critical EHS, Property conservation, corporate, etc. concerns are addressed for all plant modifications.

2.7 OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration is the federal agency of the United States that regulates workplace safety and health. Where this standard ap-plies to a loca-tion outside the US, the term “OSHA” should be replaced with the name of the regulating body responsible for worker safety in that region of the world.

2.8 PCC – Property Conservation Coordinator, is the single point accountable (SPA) for loss prevention at a given Novelis location. The plant manager typically delegates this respon-sibility to the PCC to manage day-to-day Loss prevention activities and management re-sponsibilities.

2.9 TSP – The Insurance Technical Service Provider (TSP) is the company hired by Novelis to provide Global insurance related technical services (Inspection, document review and ap-proval, consulting engineering, etc.) related to our global property insurance program. GRC, GAPS and FMG are examples of TSPs. The three main areas of service are general property / fire, machinery electrical integrity and Jurisdictional inspections (North America only). The company hired must have offices worldwide and specialize in servicing the in-dustrial and commercial HPR markets. The TSP contract is managed by the CMPC.




3.0 HAZARD 3.1 The primary purpose of fire alarm systems is life safety: To provide early warning of a fire

to permit safe evacuation of the occupants. Their secondary purposes are to monitor fire detection and suppression systems, alert Plant Fire Brigade members, and in some cases notify the Public Fire Service. In some plants, fire alarm systems can be used for evacua-tion alarms in the event of other emergencies, such as toxic gas leaks or a natural peril such as tornado.

3.2 The need for a fire alarm system is a function of building size and number of stories, fire hazards present, number of occupants, and whether or not there are fire detection and sup-pression systems to be monitored. Most countries have statutory regulations governing the provision of and design and installation of fire alarm systems. Note: This Standard may conflict with or be more or less demanding than the legal requirements.

4.0 STATUTORY REGULATIONS AND INSTALLATION STANDARDS 4.1 Where required by statutory regulations, fire alarm and detection systems shall be installed

in accordance with local ordinances and installation standards using equipment and com-ponents approved for local use.

4.2 Where there are no installation codes of practice referenced by statutory regulations or vol-untarily complied with as a local practice, fire alarm and detection systems shall be in-stalled in accordance with this standard and National Fire Protection Association Standard 72, National Fire Alarm Code.

5.0 PROVISION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 5.1 A fire alarm system shall be installed in all buildings where one or more of the following cri-

teria is met: 5.1.1 Building three or more stories high, including stories below grade, regardless of haz-

ard classification and number of occupants or building where local standards re-quire smoke detection and alarm systems to be installed.

5.1.2 Number of occupants in "high" hazard areas or buildings exceeds 25, regardless of the number of stories.




5.1.3 Number of occupants in "low" hazard areas or buildings exceeds 300, regardless of the number of stories

5.1.4 Any building that has a fire protection system (sprinklers, CO2, clean agent, etc.) installed in it.

5.2 “High" hazard areas referred to in Section 4.1.1 (ii) are the following: 5.2.1 Facilities with lacquer and paint / coating lines or other usage of flammable liquids.

5.2.2 Facilities with rolling mills.

5.2.3 Facilities with critical electrical power, control, communication or computer based

equipment.

5.2.4 Power generation facilities.

5.2.5 Any building with combustible construction or high combustible loading (10kg/m2 or 2lbs/ft2).

5.3 "Low" hazard areas referred to in Section 4.1.1 (iii) are all those areas not included in the "high" hazard area definition (See Section 4.1.2).

5.4 Where required in Section 4.1.1 for an area that is only part of a building, the system shall be installed throughout the building.

5.5 System Type and Operation 5.5.1 Fire alarm systems where required shall include:

(i) Manual pull stations shall be installed throughout the building in accordance with

local statutory requirements or standards referenced in Section 3.2.1.

(ii) Any manual pull station for automatic fire detection systems or automatic fire sup-pression systems shall sound an audible alarm and provide strobe light indication. The audible alarms shall be either bells or horns that generate a unique sound that cannot be confused with other process alarms.

(iii) Audible alarm shall be sounded throughout the building and indicating strobe lights shall be spaced so as to be visible to all occupants of the building and in accord-




ance with NFPA 72 and 101. The audible alarm shall be a single-stage, continu-ous type.

5.5.2 All fire alarm systems shall be designed so that the alarm signal cannot be automati-cally silenced.

5.5.3 Manual alarm signal silencing shall be provided only by the switches inside the fire alarm control panel. Note: These switches are meant for the use of the Fire Brigade / Department only.

5.5.4 Every fire alarm system shall be provided with a main fire alarm control panel located adjacent to the main building entrance on the ground level or as required by the Au-thority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). In plants with more than one building, it shall be lo-cated in a building as close as possible to the access gate normally used by the public fire service to enter the plant.

5.5.5 An annunciator panel or panels shall be provided when alarms can be initiated from more than one area. It is highly desirable to differentiate between manual pull stations, fire detectors and fire suppression systems within a single area.

5.5.6 In plants where more than one building has a fire alarm system a supervisory annunci-ator shall be provided at a location such as the guard house to monitor all the individ-ual building fire alarm systems.

5.5.7 In "high" hazard plants with a plant Incipient Fire Brigade, activation of the fire alarm system shall automatically transmit an alarm to the public fire service and the Plant Fire Brigade / Department.

5.5.8 In "high" hazard plants with a plant Structural Fire Brigade or Fire Department, trans-mittal of alarms to the public fire service is not required as long as the internal Bri-gade/Department is available 24/7 at the plant and is capable of communicating with the external Fire Brigade.

5.5.9 Where automatic transmittal of the alarm is required in plants where the main fire alarm control and annunciator panel is located in a constantly attended security office / guard house, transmittal of the required alarm to the public fire service may be made by telephone.

5.5.10 An emergency power supply shall be provided for all fire alarm systems. The emer-gency power supply shall be from a generator, batteries or combination thereof. The emergency power supply shall be designed so that there will be automatic transfer to




emergency power in the event of a failure of the normal power supply.

5.5.11 For Novelis operating plants, smoke detection shall be provided for: (i) Office occupancies

(ii) Basements

(iii) Electrical equipment rooms

(iv) Electrical cable spreading rooms

(v) Computer facilities and rooms (vi) Labs

(vii) Telecommunication rooms

(viii) Operating pulpits and electrical control rooms

(ix) Storage warehouses

5.5.12 Fire alarm system control panels may be used to monitor various conditions of fire

suppressions systems, such as but not limited to: (i) Movement of a control valve handle (opening or closing of a control valve).

(ii) Low air pressure in a dry pipe sprinkler system.

(iii) A low – low water level alarm in any storage tank used for fire-fighting.

(iv) Loss of electrical power to automatic start feature of electrical fire pumps.

(v) Fire pump controller set to the “OFF” position.

(vi) A temperature approaching the freezing point in any dry pipe sprinkler valve en-

closure or water storage tank used for fire-fighting.

(vii) Large roll-up doors in open position with time delay.


OFFICES – 23


1.0 SCOPE This Standard details the fire protection measures that shall be provided in all new

and existing office buildings and areas. 2.0 HAZARD Offices typically contain considerable amounts of combustible furniture, office

equipment, documents, and building finishing materials. They may also contain kitchens, libraries, printing equipment, archives storage, stationery and mail rooms, and high value computers and engineering records. Fires in these areas can result in considerable damage and have a severe impact on continuity of business opera-tions.

3.0 CONSTRUCTION 3.1 Non-Combustibility and Fire Resistance 3.1.1 The walls, floor, roof and suspended ceiling of all new offices shall be

of non-combustible construction. 3.1.2 Computer rooms within office areas shall be constructed in accor-

dance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, Computer and Process Control Rooms - 06.

3.1.3 Walls separating new office areas from adjacent occupancies shall

have a fire resistance rating of one hour for "low" hazard occupancies and two hours for "high" hazard occupancies. Where higher fire resis-tance ratings are mandated by local statutory regulations, the legal requirements shall take precedence. "High" hazard occupancies are defined as follows:

(i) Painting and foil conversion facilities including laminating, lac-

quering, printing, spray coating and associated flammable liq-uid preparation.

(ii) Rolling mill coolant and hydraulic rooms.

(iii) Anode and cathode plant green mix areas.

(iv) Thermal and diesel power generating stations. (v) Flammable liquids storage and handling areas.


OFFICES – 23


3.1.4 Walls required to have a fire-resistance rating in 3.1.3 shall extend from the floor to the underside of the floor or roof above.

3.1.5 All openings in fire-rated construction shall be protected so as to

provide the same fire rating as the penetrated construction. This in-cludes, but is not limited to doors, windows, pipes, conduits, cable trays and ducts.

3.1.6 All fire doors, dampers, construction assemblies, and fire stopping

materials and methods shall be approved by a recognized testing laboratory.

3.1.7 Glass partitions or windows in walls required to have a fire-resistance

rating in 3.1.3 are acceptable only if the required fire resistance rating is maintained.

3.1.8 The requirements of sentences 3.1.3, 3.1.4, 3.1.5, 3.1.6, 3.1.7 shall

not apply to individual offices or groups of offices with a total floor area not exceeding 50 m² (538 sq.ft.).

3.1.9 Mobile, portable or trailer type office structures shall not be placed

inside buildings. 4.0 FIRE PROTECTION 4.1 Automatic Sprinklers 4.1.1 Automatic sprinkler protection shall be provided throughout the

following:

(i) New office buildings or areas with a total floor area of 500 m² (5380 sq.ft.) or larger.

(ii) Existing office buildings or areas of combustible construction

with a total floor area of 500 m² (5380 sq.ft.) or larger.

(iii) New and existing office buildings or areas inside or attached to fully sprinklered buildings regardless of size.

(iv) Extensions to existing sprinklered office buildings or areas.

(iv) Extensions to existing unsprinklered office buildings or areas if the total floor area of the extension exceeds 500 m² (5380 sq.ft.).


OFFICES – 23


(vi) New and existing office buildings or areas whose primary function is computer processing and associated office support functions. These buildings shall be sprinklered in their entirety including the computer and related rooms.

4.1.2 When existing non-combustible construction office buildings or areas

with a total floor area of 500 m² (5380 sq.ft.) or larger and not required in 4.1.1 to be sprinklered undergo extensive renovations including re-placement of the ceilings, sprinklers shall be installed, if an adequate water supply is available without having to install a fire pump and wa-ter storage tank.

4.1.3 Offices shall be located in a building over 22.8 m (75 ft.) high only

when the building is protected by automatic sprinklers throughout. 4.1.4 Where required, automatic sprinkler systems shall be designed to

deliver 4 mm/minute over 140 m² (0.10 u.s.gpm/sq.ft. over 1500 sq.ft.) using 74oC (165oF) sprinklers on a wet pipe system.

4.1.5 A "fire department connection" shall be provided to permit boosting of

the sprinkler system pressure with a fire truck. 4.1.6 The system shall be designed, fabricated, installed and maintained in

accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 13, Automatic Sprinkler Systems.

4.1.7 In multi-storey sprinklered office buildings, each floor shall be

considered a fire zone and provided with a separate control valve and flow annunciation.

4.2 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems

4.2.1 New and existing unsprinklered office buildings and areas shall be provided with an automatic smoke detection system throughout. Smoke detection in return air ducts alone is not acceptable.

4.2.2 Smoke detection shall be not provided in new and existing sprinklered

office buildings and areas, except where required by Novelis Fire Pro-tection Engineering Standards Motor Control Centres - 04 and Com-puter and Process Control Rooms - 06.

4.2.3 The smoke detection system shall use photoelectric type detectors.


OFFICES – 23


4.2.4 Fire alarm systems shall be installed in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, Fire Alarm and Detection Sys-tems - 20.

4.2.5 Fire alarm and detection systems shall be installed in accordance with

National Fire Protection Association Standard 72, National Fire Alarm Code.

4.3 Portable Fire Extinguishers 4.3.1 Portable fire extinguishers shall be installed in accordance with

National Fire Protection Association Standard 10, Portable Fire Extin-guishers. Where local statutory requirements are in conflict, local regulations shall take precedence.

4.3.2 No new Halon 1211 extinguishers shall be placed in service. Existing

units shall be decommissioned in accordance with Novelis Fire Pro-tection Engineering Standard, Halon Replacement - 21.

4.4 Hose Stations 4.4.1 Only in existing unsprinklered office buildings where the total floor

area is 500 m² (5380 sq.ft.) or larger, hose stations shall be provided. These shall be equipped with a maximum 30 m (100 ft.) of hose and a spray (“fog”) nozzle and be capable of flowing 360 L/min (95 u.s.gpm). They shall be located so that any point in the office can be reached by at least one hose. Hose stations shall be installed in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 14, Standpipes and Hose Systems.

4.4.2 In multi-storey, sprinklered office buildings, 65 mm (2½ in.) fire

department hose connections shall be provided at each floor level in one stairwell.

4.5 Fire Hydrants 4.5.1 Fire hydrant protection shall be provided for office buildings in

accordance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, Water Supplies for Fire-Fighting - 13.


NVLFPES – 24 CONSTRUCTION SITES Revised January 13, 2016



1.0 SCOPE AND APPLICATION

1.1 This Standard details the fire protection measures that shall be provided at all construction or demolition projects in existing plants or on Greenfield sites.

1.2 This standard applies to Greenfield and Brownfield projects, in addition to other Management of Change (MOC) processes at existing operating plants.

1.3 Where there is a conflict with this standard and another applicable standard, the most stringent requirement shall apply. In the event that the content of this standard conflicts with a local regulation, the local regulation shall be met.

1.4 Where the requirements of this Standard exceed but do not conflict with local statutory regulations, both sets of requirements shall be met..

2.0 DEFINITIONS

2.1 CMPC - Corporate Manager, Property Conservation manages Novelis’ boiler / machinery and property loss prevention programs worldwide. Subject to the approval of Novelis' Executive Management, CMPC develops and administers corporate policy on loss prevention processes for Novelis.

2.2 EPCM - Engineering, Procurement, Construction Management, is a common form of contracting arrangement within the construction industry. In an EPCM arrangement, the client, in order to involve an experienced player in large projects, selects an EPCM contractor who primarily manages the entire project on behalf of the client. The EPCM contractor essentially ensures the project is completed as required and on time. (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/EPCM)

2.3 FEL – Front - End Loading - Robust planning and design early in a project's lifecycle (i.e., the front end of a project), at a time when the ability to influence changes in design is relatively high and the cost to make those changes is relatively low. It typically applies to industries with highly capital intensive, long lifecycle. The process often adds a small amount of cost to a project and uses a stage-gate process, whereby a project must pass through formal gates at well-defined milestones within the project's lifecycle before receiving funding to proceed to the next stage of work.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/EPCM

NVLFPES – 24 CONSTRUCTION SITES



FEL Stages - It is common industry practice to divide Front-End-Loading activities into three stages: - FEL-1 Conceptual Stage - FEL-2 Definitive Feasibility Study - FEL-3 Front-End Engineering and Design (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Front-end_loading)

2.4 FMG – Factory Mutual Global is a US based insurance company, with offices worldwide, that

specializes in loss prevention services primarily to large corporations throughout the world in the Highly Protected Risk (HPR) property insurance market sector. "FM Global" is the communicative name of the company, whereas the legal name is "Factory Mutual Insurance Company" (Wikimedia).

2.5 HPR – Highly Protected Risk, this term is used to describe plants that have redundant levels of fire protection systems and management programs in place to minimize the risk of loss at the plant. HPR facilities typically do not rely on one level of protection to address risk but rather establish a layered risk control approach to manage risk at an acceptable level. HPR facilities have very few insurance recommendations on the TSP loss prevention survey and work hard to resolve the items identified in a timely manner and as resources are made available.

2.6 MOC – Management of Change is a robust set of policies and procedures used to ensure critical EHS, Property conservation, corporate, etc. concerns are addressed for all plant modifications.

2.7 OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration is the federal agency of the United States that regulates workplace safety and health. Where this standard applies to a location outside the US, the term “OSHA” should be replaced with the name of the regulating body responsible for worker safety in that region of the world.

2.8 PCC – Property Conservation Coordinator, is the single point accountable (SPA) for loss prevention at a given Novelis location. The plant manager typically delegates this responsibility to the PCC to manage day-to-day Loss prevention activities and management responsibilities.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Front-end_loading




2.9 TSP – The Insurance Technical Service Provider (TSP) is the company hired by Novelis to provide Global insurance related technical services (Inspection, document review and approval, consulting engineering, etc.) related to our global property insurance program. GRC, GAPS and FMG are examples of TSPs. The three main areas of service are general property / fire, machinery electrical integrity and Jurisdictional inspections (North America only). The company hired must have offices worldwide and specialize in servicing the industrial and commercial HPR markets. The TSP contract is managed by the CMPC.

3.0 HAZARD DISCUSSION 3.1 Fire hazards in buildings under construction or demolition can be considerably greater than

when they are occupied and fire protection is in service. Large quantities of combustible building materials, packaging and refuse can accumulate. Risk of fire is increased by cutting and welding operations, smoking, and the presence of temporary heating, lighting and electrical installations.

4.0 TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS

4.1 Temporary Offices and Sheds 4.1.1 Temporary structures located within 10 m (33 ft.) of, or inside any building under

construction or demolition shall be of non-combustible construction.

4.1.2 Automatic smoke detection shall be provided throughout temporary offices in accordance with the requirements of Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standards – NVLFPES 20, Fire Alarm and Detection Systems and NVLFPES 23, Offices.

4.1.3 Automatic sprinklers may be omitted in temporary offices where otherwise required in permanent offices by Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, NVLFPES 23 - Offices.

4.2 Construction Warehouses 4.2.1 Construction warehouses shall be of non-combustible construction.

4.2.2 Construction warehouses, whether temporary or permanent and larger than 200 m²

(2,158 sq.ft.), shall be protected with automatic sprinklers.




4.2.3 Sprinkler systems shall be designed, fabricated, installed and maintained in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 13, Automatic Sprinkler Systems.

4.2.4 Sprinkler design criteria shall be in accordance with the requirements of National Fire Protection Association Standards 231, General Storage; and 231C, Rack Storage of Materials

4.2.5 The requirements of this section apply to leased warehouses not located on construction sites in addition to those owned by Novelis.

4.3 Temporary Utilities 4.3.1 Installations of temporary electrical wiring and equipment for light, heat or power

purposes shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 70, National Electrical Code.

4.3.2 Temporary wiring shall be promptly removed upon completion of the project scope item it was installed to support.

4.3.3 Temporary heaters shall be of an approved type and fuelled by either gas or fuel oil. Heaters fired by scrap building materials shall not be used. The heaters shall be allowed to cool and moved outside for refuelling. Fuel storage shall be in a separate, approved location that meets the requirements. Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard – NVLFPES 09, Flammable Liquids. See Section 5.4

4.3.4 Storage and handling of compressed flammable gases shall be in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, NVLFPES 27 - Compressed Gases in Cylinders.

4.3.5 Installations in Section 4.3.3 shall be in accordance with the following National Fire Protection Association Standards: 31 - Flammable and combustible Liquids 30 - Installation of Oil Burning Equipment, 54 - National Fuel Gas Code, 58 - Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases, 241 - Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations, 211 - Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning Devices.




4.3.6 Adequate clearance shall be maintained between heaters and combustible materials with a minimum of 3M (10ft).

5.0 CONTROL OF HAZARDS

5.1 Hot Work 5.1.1 Hot work fire prevention safeguards shall be in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection

Engineering Standard, NVLFPES 16 - Hot Work Safeguards.

5.1.2 A hot work permit system in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, NVLFPES 16 - Hot Work Safeguards shall be used in areas within 15 m (50 ft.) of existing operating "high" hazard occupancies and all others where hot work sparks may come in contact with combustible materials. "High" hazard occupancies are defined as follows:

(i) Painting and foil conversion facilities including laminating, lacquering, printing,

spray coating and associated flammable liquid preparation. (ii) Rolling mills, coolant and hydraulic rooms.

(iii) Thermal and diesel power generating stations.

(iv) Flammable liquids storage and handling areas.

(v) Areas with combustible dust

(vi) Areas with large amounts of ordinary combustible materials

5.1.3 Gas-operated hot work equipment shall be stored and handled in accordance with

National Fire Protection Association Standard, NFPA 51, Design and Installation of Oxygen-Fuel Gas Systems for Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes and Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, NVLFPES 27 - Compressed Gases in Cylinders.

5.2 Smoking 5.2.1 Smoking shall be prohibited on all construction sites except at designated smoking

area.




5.2.2 All construction projects shall have a written smoking policy and all workers on site shall have related training prior to entering the construction site.

5.2.3 Designated areas shall be provided for smoking on all construction sites / projects. These areas shall be provided with safe receptacles for smoking materials and Inspected weekly.

5.3 Materials Storage and Waste Disposal 5.3.1 Accumulations of combustible waste materials shall be removed from the inside and

within 30 m (100 ft.) of buildings on a daily basis.

5.3.2 Waste materials shall not be burned on the site.

5.3.3 Portable refuse containers (dumpsters) without permanently closed tops shall not be placed within 10 m (33 ft.) of buildings.

5.3.4 Lumber used in concrete forms shall be removed from the building under construction as soon as it is stripped from the structure.

5.3.5 Temporary storage of equipment awaiting installation or combustible construction and packaging materials shall not be permitted in buildings under construction unless required permanent fire protection is fully operational.

5.3.6 Yard storage of equipment awaiting installation or combustible construction and packaging materials shall be located at least 10 m (33 ft.) from the structure under construction or demolition.

5.4 Flammable Liquids 5.4.1 Storage and handling of combustible and flammable liquids shall be in accordance with

Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, NVLFPES 09 - Flammable Liquids.

5.4.2 Handling of Class I and II flammable liquids shall be in approved safety containers.




5.5 Explosive Materials 5.5.1 Storage, handling and use of explosive materials shall be in accordance with National

Fire Protection Association Standard, NFPA 495 - Code for the Manufacture, Transportation, Storage, and Use of Explosive Materials and applicable statutory requirements.

5.6 Roofing Operations

5.6.1 Roofing operations involving hot processes shall be conducted by a qualified roofing contractor and in a safe manner.

5.6.2 Placing asphalt and tar kettles on roof shall be avoided to the greatest extent practical. If it becomes necessary or if placed on a roof, the roof shall be non-combustible. The kettle shall be located at least 10 m (33 ft.) from the building under construction or re-novation

5.6.3 Kettles shall be constantly attended when in operation.

5.6.4 Only asphalt and tar kettles, in good condition meeting the requirements of National Fire Protection Association Standard, NFPA 241 - Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations shall be used.

5.6.5 Kettles shall be thoroughly checked for safety and fire concerns and any necessary repairs made prior to use.

5.6.6 Precautions during the installation of roofing systems requiring the use of torches shall be in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, NVLFPES 16 - Hot Work Safeguards.

5.7 Refuelling of Vehicles 5.7.1 Refuelling of vehicles shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association

Standards NFPA 505 - Powered Industrial Trucks; and NFPA 58 - Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gas.

5.7.2 Vehicle engines shall be stopped and allowed to cool prior to refuelling.

5.7.3 Trucks using liquid fuel shall be refuelled using approved dispensing pumps in designed areas a minimum of 16m (50ft) from new structures and processes and from combustibles stored or used on the site.




5.7.4 Exchange of cylinders on LP - Gas fuelled vehicles shall be done outside of buildings in designated areas.

5.7.5 Vehicles using liquid fuel and LP - Gas powered vehicles with permanently mounted cylinders shall be refuelled outdoors at least 16 m (50 ft.) from buildings.

5.7.6 Storage of reserve LP - Gas cylinders shall be in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, NVLFPES 27 - Compressed Gases in Cylinders.

5.7.7 Refilling of LP - Gas containers shall be at locations approved for that purpose and in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard, NFPA 58 - Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gas.

5.7.8 Smoking shall not be permitted in vehicle refuelling areas at any time, see Section 5.2

6.0 FIRE PROTECTION

6.1.1 Project Manager's Responsibility A qualified person shall be designated by the Project Manager to be responsible for fire prevention on the construction and demolition sites - Project site Property Conservation Coordinator. This person shall be the Novelis Responsible Person (NRP) for loss prevention on the site and have the authority to enforce the requirements of this Standard.

6.1.2 The person shall also have the responsibility of project Site fire Chief in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard NVLPFES 18 - Plant Fire Brigades. If this is a Brownfield project at an existing Novelis plant the project site PCC shall interface closely with the plant based PCC.

6.2 Security 6.2.1 Guard service shall be provided at all Greenfield projects and Brownfield extensions to

existing plants when these extensions are adjacent to "high" hazard areas as described in 5.1.2 or are larger than 1000 m² (10750 sq.ft.).

6.2.2 Greenfield construction sites shall be provided with adequate fencing and other means to restrict access by unauthorized persons.




6.2.3 For Brownfield site at Novelis plants construction sites shall be provided with adequate fencing and other means to restrict access to authorized persons (Construction and well as plant Personnel).

6.3 Access for Fire Fighting 6.3.1 Access to buildings under construction or demolition shall be maintained for fire

fighting vehicles at all times. All construction sites shall have designated fire lanes that shall be keep clear at all time. This is a construction site PCC responsibility.

6.3.2 Access to fire hydrants and first aid fire protection equipment shall be maintained at all times.

6.3.3 Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be provide where combustibles are present or where ignition sources area present, see Section 6.5.2.

6.4 Water Supplies 6.4.1 Permanent water supplies, distribution mains and fire hydrants shall be placed in

service prior to the start of construction work that involves anything other than a minimal amount of combustible materials being on site.

6.4.2 Temporary water supplies, with adequate flow and pressure for manual fire fighting shall be placed in service in order to feed the hydrant system when installation of the permanent supply will not be completed prior to construction work commencing as described in Section 6.4.1.

6.4.3 For Brownfield projects at Novelis facilities the project site PCC and the plant based PCC shall work together to ensure both the construction site and operating plant have access to hydrants for manual firefighting at all times.

6.5 Temporary Fire Protection 6.5.1 Where hose stations are specified as part of permanent fire protection for a project,

they shall be made operational as soon as temporary or permanent water supplies are available.




6.5.2 Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided throughout construction and demolition sites. They shall be installed in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard, NFPA 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers. Where statutory requirements are in conflict, local regulations shall take precedence. Extinguishers shall have an ABC Class rating.

6.6 Commissioning of Fire Protection Systems 6.6.1 For construction projects, commissioning of fire protection systems shall be completed

and fully tested prior to handing over of project related fire systems to the plant based PCC.

6.6.2 All fixed fire suppression systems protecting buildings and equipment, including but not limited to fire pumps, sprinkler, Inergen, FM-200, carbon dioxide, water spray, foam, and fire alarm and detection systems, shall be operational prior to cold / hot commissioning or start-up of equipment or the introduction of combustible materials into the buildings or process equipment.

6.7 Fire Prevention Inspections 6.7.1 A fire prevention inspection program in accordance with Novelis Fire Protection

Engineering Standard, NVLFPES 17 - Fire Prevention and Equipment Inspections shall be in force on all construction and demolition sites. This is a responsibility of the construction site PCC.

7.0 DEMOLITION SAFEGUARDS

7.1 General 7.1.1 Flammable liquid storage tanks and piping shall be drained, cleaned of all residues and

purged prior to their removal or other demolition work.

7.1.2 When buildings being demolished are protected by sprinklers and/or hose stations, these systems shall be kept in service as long as the condition requiring protection continues to exist.

7.1.3 Gas supplies shall be turned off and capped at a point outside the building prior to demolition commencing for each process or building.




7.1.4 Electrical service shall be turned off and electrically disconnected for all buildings and processes under demolition.

7.1.5 All exceptions to the requirements of this section shall be approved by the construction site PCC.


NVLFPES – 25 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM COMMISSIONING Revised January 13, 2016



1.0 SCOPE AND APPLICATION

1.1 This Standard details the commissioning and acceptance testing that shall be undertaken to ensure that all new fire protection systems and modifications to existing ones are in-stalled and made operational in accordance with the approved specifications and draw-ings, and applicable Novelis Fire Protection Engineering and National Fire Protection As-sociation Standards.

1.2 This standard applies to Greenfield and Brownfield projects, in addition to other Manage-ment of Change (MOC) processes at existing operating plants.

1.3 Where there is a conflict with this standard and another applicable standard, the most strin-gent requirement shall apply

2.0 DEFNITIONS

2.1 CMPC - Corporate Manager, Property Conservation manages Novelis’ boiler / machinery and property loss prevention programs worldwide. Subject to the approval of Novelis' Ex-ecutive Management, CMPC develops and administers corporate policy on loss preven-tion processes for Novelis.

2.2 EPCM - Engineering, Procurement, Construction Management, is a common form of con-tracting arrangement within the construction industry. In an EPCM arrangement, the client, in order to involve an experienced player in large projects, selects an EPCM contractor who primarily manages the entire project on behalf of the client. The EPCM contractor es-sentially ensures the project is completed as required and on time. (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/EPCM)

NVLFPES – 25 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM COMMISSIONING



2.3 FEL – Front - End Loading - Robust planning and design early in a project's lifecycle (i.e., the front end of a project), at a time when the ability to influence changes in design is rela-tively high and the cost to make those changes is relatively low. It typically applies to in-dustries with highly capital intensive, long lifecycle. The process often adds a small amount of cost to a project and uses a stage-gate process, whereby a project must pass through formal gates at well defined milestones within the project's lifecycle before receiv-ing funding to proceed to the next stage of work. FEL Stages - It is common industry practice to divide Front-End-Loading activities into three stages: - FEL-1 Conceptual Stage - FEL-2 Definitive Feasibility Study - FEL-3 Front-End Engineering and Design (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Front-end_loading)

2.4 FMG – Factory Mutual Global is a US based insurance company, with offices worldwide, that specializes in loss prevention services primarily to large corporations throughout the world in the Highly Protected Risk (HPR) property insurance market sector. "FM Global" is the communicative name of the company, whereas the legal name is "Factory Mutual In-surance Company" (Wikimedia).

2.5 HPR – Highly Protected Risk, this term is used to describe plants that have redundant lev-els of fire protection systems and management programs in place to minimize the risk of loss at the plant. HPR facilities typically do not rely on one level of protection to address risk but rather establish a layered risk control approach to manage risk at an acceptable level. HPR facilities have very few insurance recommendations on the TSP loss preven-tion survey and work hard to resolve the items identified in a timely manner and as re-sources are made available.

2.6 MOC – Management of Change is a robust set of policies and procedures used to ensure critical EHS, Property conservation, corporate, etc. concerns are addressed for all plant modifications.

2.7 OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration is the federal agency of the United States that regulates workplace safety and health. Where this standard applies to a loca-tion outside the US, the term “OSHA” should be replaced with the name of the regulating body responsible for worker safety in that region of the world.




2.8 PCC – Property Conservation Coordinator, is the single point accountable (SPA) for loss prevention at a given Novelis location. The plant manager typically delegates this respon-sibility to the PCC to manage day-to-day Loss prevention activities and management re-sponsibilities. 2.8.1 Plant Based PCC – See above.

2.8.2 Project Based PCC – Project team member, assigned by the project manager, to be

responsible for loss prevention and fire protection systems for the project. If no PCC is assigned, project manager assumes the role.

2.9 TSP – The Insurance Technical Service Provider (TSP) is the company hired by Novelis to provide Global insurance related technical services (Inspection, document review and ap-proval, consulting engineering, etc.) related to our global property insurance pro-gram. GRC, GAPS and FMG are examples of TSPs. The three main areas of service are general property / fire, machinery electrical integrity and Jurisdictional inspections (North America only). The company hired must have offices worldwide and specialize in servic-ing the industrial and commercial HPR markets. The TSP contract is managed by the CMPC.

3.0 GENERAL

3.1 Application

3.1.1 This Standard shall apply to all new fire protection systems and modifications to ex-

isting ones, including, but not limited to the following: (i) Fire pumps and reservoirs.

(ii) Underground and aboveground water mains and fire hydrants.

(iii) Sprinkler systems (wet-pipe, dry-pipe, and preaction).

(iv) Water spray and foam-water spray systems.

(v) Interior standpipes and hoses.

(vi) Fire alarm and detection systems.

(vii) Special hazard systems (Inergen, FM-200, CO2, and dry chemical).




(viii) Passive fire protection features such as fire walls, penetration seals, fire doors, etc.

3.2 Responsibilities of Project Management

3.2.1 It is the project manager, project based PCC or plant based PCCs (Whichever is appli-cable) responsibility to ensure that all applicable passive and active fire systems that are covered by their project scope, are in place and active prior to the hazard being present that they have been installed to protect. See NVLFPES 19 - Projects Loss Prevention Management of Change 2012 for additional guidance. The following shall be accomplished: (i) Active and passive fire systems shall be incorporated into the master schedule

for the project and be coordinated with the hazards they are intended to protect. This will allow them to become critical path and expedited if necessary.

(ii) All fire protection scope items shall be tracked and ultimately turned over to the plant PCC using Form - NVLFPES 19 - Appendix 1 - Novelis Testing and Turn-over Tracking Form.

3.1.2 The requirements of this Standard shall be met prior to the fire protection system instal-lation being considered complete, the contractor demobilizing and final payment au-thorized. After the completion of final acceptance testing the system shall be turned over to the plant based PCC for long term Inspection, Testing and Maintenance (ITM) in accordance with NVLFPES 17.

3.1.3 Deficiencies found during commissioning and acceptance testing shall be corrected and the failed test procedure repeated before conducting final acceptance testing.

3.1.4 A separate contractor's acceptance form shall be completed by the contractor for each new system or modification to an existing one and submitted to the project or plant based PCC. Acceptance forms are found in Appendix I.

3.1.5 The contractor's acceptance form shall be signed by the PCC only when all require-ments of this Standard have been met; there are no outstanding deficiencies to be corrected, all approved as-built drawings, calculations and related documents have been delivered to the plant based PCC, and the system is left in service.

3.1.6 A copy of the signed contractor's acceptance form shall be kept permanently on file at the plant. A signed copy shall be submitted to the TSP and maintained by the plant based PCC for future reference.




3.1.7 Final, as-built drawings, calculations and related documents shall be kept permanently on file at the plant by the PCC.

3.1.8 The contractor shall be responsible for all work during commissioning and testing re-quired for final acceptance by the PCC and TSP. The project based PCC shall witness all commissioning and acceptance testing.

3.1.9 All recommendations made by the TSP assigned to the project during the specification and drawing review stage shall be addressed prior to commissioning and acceptance testing of the system. Approval shall be obtained from the CMPC for all TSP recom-mendations that are not to be completed. The TSP shall be notified in writing by the project PCC of all items which are ultimately not completed.

3.1.10 The authority having jurisdiction (e.g. fire department or building code enforcement official) shall be notified in advance of commissioning and acceptance testing as they may wish to witness the testing.

4.0 WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

4.1 The following requirements shall apply to all wet-pipe, dry-pipe and pre-action sprinkler, water spray and foam-water spray, interior standpipe and hose, and underground and above-ground mains and hydrant systems. 4.1.1 The system shall be hydrostatically tested at 13.8 bars (200 psi) for a period of not less

than two hours. If the maximum system operating pressure exceeds 10.3 bars (150 psi), the hydrostatic testing shall be conducted at 3.4 bars (50 psi) in excess of the maximum system operating pressure. Testing shall be conducted in accordance with NFPA codes and standards.

4.1.2 The maximum static pressure for a fire pump or booster pump shall be the net zero flow or "churn" pressure. For all fire systems with pump supplies, this “churn” pressure shall be used as the maximum system pressure. Note: This pressure should reflect a full water storage tank.

4.1.3 Supervisory alarms (e.g. valve tamper switches, dry system low air pressure and dry valve enclosure temperature), water flow alarms and equipment interlocks shall be tested individually for proper operation and annunciation to the plant / system fire alarm panel.




4.1.4 All piping associated with the Fire Department Connection (FDC) including the inlet pipe, between the check valve and the outside hose connections, shall be flushed and hydrostatically tested in the same manner as the rest of the system.

4.1.5 If pressure reducing valves are present, they shall be tested by verifying proper oper-ation in accordance with the manufacturer's data and the pressure reduction across them at both maximum and normal inlet pressures.

4.2 Sprinkler Systems 4.2.1 Dry-pipe systems shall be tested by pressurizing with 2.8 bars (40 psi) of air for

24 hours. Pressure shall not drop by more than 0.1 bars (1½ psi) in that period.

4.2.2 Dry-pipe valves shall be trip tested by pressurizing the system to its normal operating air pressure and opening the inspector's test connection. The elapsed time between opening the inspector's test connection and water discharging from it shall not exceed 60 seconds.

4.2.3 The system main drain shall be tested by fully opening the 50 mm (2 in.) drain valve until the system pressure stabilizes. The drain accepting this flow shall not back up.

4.2.4 In addition to the requirements contained within this Standard, commissioning and ac-ceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with National Fire Protection Asso-ciation Standard 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems

4.3 Water Spray Systems 4.3.1 A full flow discharge test shall be conducted. During this test, steps can be taken to pro-

tect equipment from potential water damage.

4.3.2 Prior to conducting the full flow discharge test, each manual release point (pneumatic and electrical) shall be tested for its operation of the deluge valve.

4.3.3 Prior to conducting the full flow discharge test, each nozzle shall be visually inspected for its proper alignment and obstruction. During this inspection, the visible portion of the piping system shall also be inspected for abnormal conditions.

4.3.4 Prior to conducting the system discharge test, if the system is automatic, detectors shall be individually tested:




(i) Heat detectors shall be tested by exposing them to a heat source in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

(ii) Flame detectors shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

(iii) The full flow discharge test shall be videotaped to verify proper flow from each nozzle and coverage of the area or equipment protected. A copy of the video tape shall be submitted to the plant based PCC and TSP for review.

4.3.5 The plant based PCC, TSP and CMPC shall be advised prior to the planned full flow discharge test date.

4.3.6 In addition to the requirements contained within this Standard, commissioning and ac-ceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with National Fire Protection Asso-ciation Standard 15, Water Spray Fixed Systems.

4.4 Foam-Water Spray Systems 4.4.1 The requirements of Section 4.3 shall apply to foam-water spray systems.

4.4.2 Prior to conducting the full flow discharge test, all components of the foam storage and

proportioning system shall be tested for proper operation and the foam concentrate storage tank filled.

4.4.3 It is advisable, but not required to flow foam solution through the nozzles when con-ducting the full flow discharge test. A water-only full flow discharge test is acceptable. It is sufficient to discharge foam solution through hoses or other discharge devices where the flow can be measured and foam solution samples taken. The flow rate shall be at least equal to the minimum required flow of the foam proportioning equipment. In order to ensure that the foam-water solution has stabilized, the foam making equip-ment shall discharge for at least 30 seconds prior to samples being taken. Samples shall be analyzed to verify that the foam concentration is in accordance with the design criteria.

4.4.4 All components of the system into which foam has been introduced, except those normally containing foam concentrate when the system is not operating, shall be thoroughly flushed after the full flow discharge test.




4.4.5 In addition to the requirements contained within this Standard, commissioning and ac-ceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with National Fire Protection Asso-ciation Standard 16, Deluge Foam-Water and Foam-Water Spray Systems.

4.5 Standpipe and Hose Systems 4.5.1 A flow test on the most hydraulically remote hose outlet or outlets shall be performed to

ensure that the flow and pressure are in accordance with the design criteria.

4.5.2 In addition to the requirements contained within this Standard, commissioning and ac-ceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with National Fire Protection Asso-ciation Standard 14, Standpipe and Hose Systems.

5.0 FIRE PUMPS, RESERVOIRS AND WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

5.1 Underground and Aboveground Water Mains 5.1.1 The trench for underground mains shall be backfilled between joints prior to testing to

prevent movement of the pipe. If plastic piping is used, the trenches shall be backfilled to finish grade to ensure the piping system does not move during testing.

5.1.2 Underground and aboveground mains and piping leading to extinguishing systems shall be thoroughly flushed before the final connection to extinguishing system piping is made. Flushing shall be done by opening a hydrant at a dead end of the system or, if the system is looped, by closing divisional valves to allow maximum flow through each line. Flushing shall be in accordance with the flow rates given in Section 7.0 of Novelis Fire Protection Engineering Standard, Water Supplies for Fire Fighting - 13.

5.1.3 See Sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 for hydrostatic testing requirements.

5.1.4 Fire hydrants shall be fully opened and closed under system pressure. If the water supply system contains fire pumps, hydrants shall be operated with the pumps run-ning. Dry barrel hydrants shall be checked for proper drainage.

5.1.5 Control valves shall be fully open and closed under system pressure to ensure proper operation.

5.1.6 In addition to the requirements contained within this Standard, commissioning and ac-ceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with National Fire Protection Asso-ciation Standard 24, Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances.




5.2 Fire Pump and Reservoir Installations 5.2.1 The pump acceptance test shall be conducted by the TSP assigned to the project /

plant. The installing contractor shall be present.

5.2.2 All piping associated with the fire pump installation shall be hydrostatically tested in ac-cordance with in Section 4.1.1 and 4.1.2.

5.2.3 Pump suction piping shall be thoroughly flushed.

5.2.4 The water storage reservoir shall be completely filled prior to fire pump commissioning.

5.2.5 Prior to fire pump commissioning, the entire piping system from the tank to the distribu-tion piping network shall be inspected to ensure all components are properly supported and anchored to prevent piping system failure. All foundation connections shall be in-spected to ensure the fire pump skid is properly secured to its foundation.

5.2.6 Final acceptance of the fire pump installation shall be performed by the TSP in accord-ance to manufacturer and NFPA 20 requirements. Upon satisfactory completion of the testing, the TSP shall issue the completed pump acceptance test data form certifying the installation and proper function of equipment.

5.2.7 The pump acceptance test shall certify the following: (i) The pump performs to the certified characteristic curve supplied by the manufac-

turer.

(ii) The installation is completed in accordance with approved plans.

(iii) The power supply, controller, power transfer switch, driver, accessories (relief valve, right angle drive, flexible couplings, alarms and interlocks), suction supply and pump house are in good order.

(iv) Inspection and maintenance practices are in place.

5.2.8 The acceptance test shall include the following: (i) The pump shall be started automatically on pressure drop ten times and manu-

ally ten times. The pump driver shall operate a minimum of five minutes at full speed for each start sequence.




(ii) The tests in (i) shall be divided between both sets of batteries for engine driven pumps.

(iii) At least five different flows and pressure readings shall be recorded by flowing water through the pump test header or the flowmeter. All test readings shall be plotted and compared to the pump characteristic curve.

(iv) The driver speed shall be recorded on each flow and the engine checked for overheating. The current demand shall be recorded for electric driven pumps.

(v) The gear drive shall be checked for excessive noise, vibration or heating.

(vi) In addition to the requirements contained within this Standard, commissioning

and acceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with National Fire Pro-tection Association Standards 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps and 22, Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection.

6.0 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS

6.1 Each alarm initiating device (detector, manual pull station, flow switch, pressure switch, etc.)

shall be individually tested for its proper operation and response of the system. Testing of detectors shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

6.2 Each indicating (visual or sound) appliance (horn, bell, siren or light) shall be individually tested for its proper operation.

6.3 Each initiating device, indicating appliance and signaling line circuit shall be individually tested to confirm that the integrity of the conductors is being properly supervised and associated trouble indicators operate properly. One connection should be opened at no less than 10 percent of the alarm initiating devices and indicating appliances. At least one connection shall be opened on each signaling line circuit when conducting the above test. This shall not be done at the fire alarm control panel or sub panels, but instead at the initiating device to ensure the entire wiring system is checked.

6.4 Each fire extinguishing system valve tamper (position) switch shall be individually tested for its proper operation of associated trouble indication in fire alarm control panels.

6.5 Each interlock with ancillary equipment, such as, fans, pumps, heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and equipment drive motors shall be tested for its proper operation.

6.6 The emergency power supply shall be tested to ensure that the transfer to emergency power functions as intended.




6.7 Annunciator panels, displays or printers used for indicating alarm and trouble conditions shall

be tested to ensure that all signals initiated during testing are properly displayed or recorded.

6.8 Equipment for transmission of signals from fire alarm and detection system control panels to proprietary or third party (off-site) monitoring stations shall be tested to ensure its proper op-eration. Prior to performing testing a call shall be made to the monitoring company to ensure they are aware of system testing.

6.9 In addition to the requirements contained within this Standard, commissioning and ac-ceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 72, National Fire Alarm Code.

7.0 SPECIAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

7.1 Carbon Dioxide Systems 7.1.1 A full flow discharge test of each hazard protected shall be conducted. Prior to the dis-

charge test being conducted, the component functional tests required in Section 7.1.3 through 7.1.13 shall be completed.

7.1.2 Appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure the safety of personnel in areas where atmospheres will be made hazardous by the discharge of carbon dioxide during the test. All low areas and basements shall be inspected prior to performing system test-ing.

7.1.3 The TSP assigned to the project shall witness the final discharge test.

7.1.4 All supervised and pneumatic circuits and functions shall be tested to ensure proper operation.

7.1.5 All functions of the control panel shall be individually tested to ensure proper opera-tion.

7.1.6 Each system actuating device (detector, manual push-button or pull station, or pneu-matic release station) shall be individually tested for its proper actuation of the system. Testing of detectors shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

7.1.7 The fire alarm portion of the system shall be fully tested in accordance with Section 6.0.

7.1.8 Each pre-discharge time delay and timed discharge function shall be tested to ensure




its proper operation. Note: All pre-discharge alarms shall be mechanical based de-vices. Electrical time delays are no longer allowed, per NFPA 12.

7.1.9 Each selector or directional valve shall be tested for its proper operation and resetting.

7.1.10 Dampers and doors required to close upon system discharge shall be tested for their proper operation.

7.1.11 Carbon dioxide storage cylinders or tanks shall be verified full prior to testing. . The re-frigeration system on low pressure storage tanks shall be tested for its proper opera-tion and performance in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended duty cycle. The storage tank pressure and refrigeration system operation shall be monitored over a three day period after the tank has been filled. prior to conducting the full flow dis-charge test.

7.1.12 The full flow discharge test shall be videotaped to verify proper operation and coverage of the system. A copy of the video tape shall be submitted to the plant based PCC and CMPC.

7.1.13 Recorded concentration measurements shall be taken at appropriate points in the pro-tected space during the full flow discharge test.

7.1.14 The installing contractor shall be responsible for refilling the storage tank or cylinders and leaving the system fully operational prior to turning over the system to the plant based PCC.

7.1.15 In addition to the requirements contained within this Standard, commissioning and ac-ceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with National Fire Protection Asso-ciation Standard 12, Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems.

7.2 Inergen and FM-200 Systems 7.2.1 Discharge tests of Inergen and FM-200 systems shall not be conducted. A functional

test of all system components as described in Section 6.1.3 through 6.1.13 shall be conducted with all gas cylinders disconnected.




7.2.2 Integrity of rooms protected with Inergen or FM-200 shall be verified using door fan testing procedure. Testing shall include over-pressurization and de-pressurization of the room to ensure room integrity. ". The test procedure and calculation of room leak-age shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 2001, Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems. Special consideration shall be given to over-pressurization of rooms protected with Inergen or Nitrogen to ensure relief vents are properly sized.




Appendix I

Contractor Acceptance Forms




CONTRACTOR’S APPLICATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF GASEOUS EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS JOB OR CONTRACT NUMBER: DATE: CONTRACTOR: LOCATION: HAZARD:

Instructions:

The contractor will fill out “Part A” and send, along with copy of all drawing (including a wiring diagram when applicable), to GAPS. GAPS will retain information and return a copy with “acceptance” of “Part A”. The contractor will fill out “Part B” when the turn-over tests have been completed and will return this copy to GAPS. The next GAPS field engineer visiting the facility will complete “Part C” and will return it to the GPS account Manager for its files.

It is understood that the signing of this form by the representative of the purchaser in no way preju-dices any claim which the purchaser may have against the installer for fault material, poor work-manship or failure to comply with the requirements of FM Global or Local Ordinances. FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE INSTALLATION CANNOT BE GRANTED UNTILL THE FORM WITH “PART A, B AND C PROPERLY COMPLETED HAS BEEN RECEIVED. Parts A, B, and C appear on the following pages: Reference: FM Global EMV 2332 (1/2000)




CONTRACTOR’S APPLICATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF GASEOUS EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS PART “A” - PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS




Reference: FM Global EMV 2332 (1/2000)




CONTRACTOR’S APPLICATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF GASEOUS EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS PART “B” - INSTALLER’S TURN-OVER TEST




Reference: FM Global EMV 2332 (1/2000) CONTRACTOR’S APPLICATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF GASEOUS EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS PART “C” - GAPS FIELD EXAMINATION OF COMPLETED INSTALLATION




Reference: FM Global EMV 2332 (1/2000)



Revision Date: January 13, 2016 Page 30 - 6 -




- 10 -- 11 -

SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Access to site.

4. Coordination with occupants.

5. Work restrictions.

6. Specification and drawing conventions.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: CASH III – Bathroom and Breakroom Facility

1. Project Location: Novelis Corporation, 448 County Route 1A, Oswego, NY 13126

B. Owner and Construction Manager: Novelis Corporation

1. Owner's Representative: Brad Bailey

a. Email: [email protected]

b. Cell: 315-402-9324

C. Engineer: C&S Engineers, Inc., 499 Col. Eileen Collins Blvd., Syracuse, NY 13212

1. Project Manager: Joseph D. Nadzan, P.E., LEED AP

a. Email: [email protected]

b. Office: 315-703-4467

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. This package generally includes the furnishing and installation of the CASH III

Bathroom and Breakroom Facility including architectural, structural, mechanical,

electrical, plumbing, and fire protection. Refer to drawings and technical specifications

for all requirements of this bid package.

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

SUMMARY 011000 - 2

2. Any temporary protection and cold weather construction requirements shall also be

included.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as

indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb

portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to project area.

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances

serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency

vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction

operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by

construction operations.

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing adjacent building(s) during entire

construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts

and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day

operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used

facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's

operations.

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to

occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to

Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with

completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not

constitute acceptance of the total Work.

SUMMARY 011000 - 3

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work on the project site to normal business working hours of 7 a.m.

to 4 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary

utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and

vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Owner’s written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to

identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of

the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

SUMMARY 011000 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Requests for Information (RFIs).

4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility

are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Construction Manager, Engineer, or Contractor seeking information

required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a

special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 5 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key

personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project

site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone


numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide

names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of

individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web

site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before

or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at

meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of

the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of

the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Engineer will return RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.


2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or

interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Project number.

3. Date.

4. Name of Contractor.

5. Name of Engineer and Construction Manager.

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

7. RFI subject.

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

12. Contractor's signature.

13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items

needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Form bound in Project Manual.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Engineer's and Construction Manager's Action: Engineer and Construction Manager will review

each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Engineer's

response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer or Construction Manager after 1:00 p.m. will

be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.

d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.

e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

f. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on submittals.

g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal.


a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify Engineer and Construction Manager in writing within 10

days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Engineer's and Construction Manager's action, immediately distribute the RFI

response to affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer and Construction Manager

within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project

site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Construction Manager will distribute the meeting minutes to

everyone concerned, including Owner, and Engineer, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a

preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and

Engineer, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner/Construction Manager, Engineer, and

their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and

other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be

familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

e. Lines of communications.

f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

g. Procedures for RFIs.

h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

k. Submittal procedures.

l. Preparation of record documents.

m. Use of the premises and existing building.

n. Work restrictions.

o. Working hours.

p. Owner's occupancy requirements.

q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.

s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.

t. Construction waste management and recycling.

u. Parking availability.

v. Office, work, and storage areas.


w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

x. Safety.

y. Security.

z. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting

minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise

Construction Manager of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Review of mockups.

i. Possible conflicts.

j. Compatibility requirements.

k. Time schedules.

l. Weather limitations.

m. Manufacturer's written instructions.

n. Warranty requirements.

o. Compatibility of materials.

p. Acceptability of substrates.

q. Temporary facilities and controls.

r. Space and access limitations.

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

t. Testing and inspecting requirements.

u. Installation procedures.

v. Coordination with other work.

w. Required performance results.

x. Protection of adjacent work.

y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties

requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.


D. Project Closeout Conference: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a project

closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Engineer, but no later than 30 days

prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner/Construction Manager, Engineer, and

their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and

other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be

familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,

including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance.

c. Submittal of written warranties.

d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.

e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.

f. Requirements for demonstration and training.

g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment.

i. Submittal procedures.

j. Coordination of separate contracts.

k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.

l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

3. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Construction Manager will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner , Construction Manager, and Engineer,

each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress

or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be

represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with

Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,

in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to

do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.


3) Status of submittals.

4) Deliveries.

5) Off-site fabrication.

6) Access.

7) Site utilization.

8) Temporary facilities and controls.

9) Progress cleaning.

10) Quality and work standards.

11) Status of correction of deficient items.

12) Field observations.

13) Status of RFIs.

14) Status of proposal requests.

15) Pending changes.

16) Status of Change Orders.

17) Pending claims and disputes.

18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the

meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue

revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.




SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require

Engineer's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Action submittals are those

submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not

require Engineer's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected

for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in

individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems

used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent

fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,

fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making

corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer and Construction Manager and

additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.


1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required

to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead

time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's

construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing

for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal category: Action; informational.

d. Name of subcontractor.

e. Description of the Work covered.

f. Scheduled date for Engineer's and Construction Manager's final release or

approval.

g. Scheduled date of fabrication.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Engineer's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be

provided by Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification

Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Engineer and Construction Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a

submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are

received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.

Time for review shall commence on Construction Manager's receipt of submittal. No extension

of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in

advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.


1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Construction Manager will advise

Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as

initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as

follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling

navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed

by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., NSIR-061000.01).

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,

NSIR-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval

markings and action taken by Engineer and Construction Manager.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form provided by

Construction manager, containing the following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Engineer.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

h. Category and type of submittal.

i. Submittal purpose and description.

j. Specification Section number and title.

k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items.

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

n. Related physical samples submitted directly.

o. Indication of full or partial submittal.

p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

r. Other necessary identification.

s. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file

metadata:

a. Project name.

b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.


c. Manufacturer name.

d. Product name.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested

by Engineer and Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from

requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include

same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action

stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action

submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by

individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification

Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Engineer, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and

retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that

entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.


1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data

are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.


1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic

submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and

identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time

of use.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from

manufacturer's product line. Engineer, through Construction Manager, will return

submittal with options selected.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the

following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract

Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.

3. Number and name of room or space.

4. Location within room or space.

5. Submit product schedule in the following format:


F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200

"Construction Progress Documentation."

G. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with

requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified

in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."


I. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and

Maintenance Data."

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact

information of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure

Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and

personnel certified.

L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturers' names.

5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.

S. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.


T. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

U. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests

performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,

for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for

calculations. Include page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections

and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer and

Construction Manager.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700

"Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Engineer and Construction Manager will review each submittal, make marks

to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Engineer will stamp each submittal

with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Engineer and Construction Manager will review each submittal and

will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer and

Construction Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial

submittals has received prior approval from Engineer and Construction Manager.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

for resubmittal without review.


E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Engineer without

action.


REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Engineer's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the

Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Engineer. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control

performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to

dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on

which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.


B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not

bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain

copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's

"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'

"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the

Contract Documents.

1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.

2. AAMA - American Engineerural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.

3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.

4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;

www.transportation.org.

5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.

6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.

7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org.

8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.

9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.

10. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.

11. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.

12. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.

13. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.

14. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.

15. AIA - American Institute of Engineers (The); www.aia.org.

16. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.

17. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.

18. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.

19. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.

20. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.

21. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.

22. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.

23. APA - Engineerural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.

24. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.

25. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).

26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).

27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.


28. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.

29. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See

ASCE).

30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org.

31. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);

www.asme.org.

32. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.

33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.

34. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials

International); www.astm.org.

35. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.

36. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.

37. AWI - Engineerural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.

38. AWMAC - Engineerural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;

www.awmac.com.

39. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-

Preservers' Association); www.awpa.com.

40. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.

41. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.

42. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.

43. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.

44. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.

45. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association); www.bifma.com.

46. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.

47. BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.); (See

ICC).

48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);

www.bwfbadminton.org.

49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.

50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.

51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.

52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.

53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.

54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.

55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.

56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.

57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.

58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.

59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.

60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.

61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.

62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.

63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.

64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-

international.org.

65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.

66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.

67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.

68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).


69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.

70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.

71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec-central.org.

72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA).

73. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).

74. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.

75. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.

76. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.

77. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).

78. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.

79. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball

Federation); www.fiba.com.

80. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball

Federation); www.fivb.org.

81. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.

82. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.

83. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;

www.floridaroof.com.

84. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.

85. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.

86. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.

87. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.

88. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.

89. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.

90. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).

91. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).

92. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.

93. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.

94. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.

95. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).

96. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).

97. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.

98. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.

99. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.

100. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.

101. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.

102. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.

103. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of

North America); www.ies.org.

104. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).

105. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.

106. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.

107. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association;

www.igshpa.okstate.edu.

108. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.

109. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);

www.intertek.com.

110. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems,

and Automation Society); www.isa.org.

111. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).


112. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid

Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.

113. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.

114. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).

115. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.

116. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.

117. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).

118. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.

119. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.

120. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.

121. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.

122. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.

123. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.

124. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.

125. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding &

Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com.

126. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.

127. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;

www.mss-hq.org.

128. NAAMM - National Association of Engineerural Metal Manufacturers;

www.naamm.org.

129. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers

International); www.nace.org.

130. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.

131. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.

132. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.

133. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.

134. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.

135. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.

136. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.

137. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.

138. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.

139. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.

140. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.

141. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org.

142. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).

143. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.

144. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.

145. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.

146. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).

147. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.

148. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.

149. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.

150. NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org.

151. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.

152. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.

153. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.

154. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.

155. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.

156. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.


157. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology

Association); www.plasa.org.

158. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.

159. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.

160. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.

161. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org.

162. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.

163. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.

164. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.

165. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com.

166. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See

ASCE).

167. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.

168. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.

169. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.

170. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;

www.smacna.org.

171. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.

172. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.

173. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.

174. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.

175. SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.

176. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.

177. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.

178. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.

179. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.

180. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.

181. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.

182. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America);

www.tileusa.com.

183. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.

184. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA -

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance);

www.tiaonline.org.

185. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See

TIA).

186. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.

187. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.

188. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.

189. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.

190. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC).

191. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.

192. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.

193. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.

194. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.

195. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.

196. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.

197. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.

198. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.

199. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.


200. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California);

www.wicnet.org.

201. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA).

202. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.

203. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This

information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;

www.iapmo.org.

2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.

3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following

list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.

2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.

3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov.

4. DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.

6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.

7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.

8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.

9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.

10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.

11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies

Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov.

12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.

13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.

14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research

Program; www.trb.org.

15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity

Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.

16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.

17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;

www.ojp.usdoj.gov.

18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org.

19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and

regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be

accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;

www.gpo.gov/fdsys.


2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from

Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).

4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).

5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point;

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.

b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.

c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design

Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.

6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).

7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.

8. USATBCB - U.S. Engineerural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See

USAB).




PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in

Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on

products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product

literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new

products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal

process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or

exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or

model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,

function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other

characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers

named in the specification.



A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.

Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification

Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable

Products" Article.

2. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product

request. Engineer will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of approval or

rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or

seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if

previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other

losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and

to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.


2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide

specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for

submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are

undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used

successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will make selection.


5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or

approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"

Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the

named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for

Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be

considered.

3. Products:

4. Manufacturers:

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or

indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.

Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics

that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable

Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named

manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Engineer's sample",

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer's sample. Engineer's

decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution

Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by

Engineer from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with

requirements. Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's

product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for comparable

product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,

Engineer may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,

that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,

and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.


2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of Engineers and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.



EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the

Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. Installation of the Work.

4. Cutting and patching.

5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.

6. Progress cleaning.

7. Starting and adjusting.

8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.

3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and

levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after

installation of other work.


A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time

cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.


2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance

and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform

patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be

relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time

permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during

interruption of permanent services and systems.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of

construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Engineer of

locations and details of cutting and await directions from Engineer before proceeding.

Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and

patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or

increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components

in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in

increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements

include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Fire separation assemblies.

c. Air or smoke barriers.

d. Fire-suppression systems.

e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.

f. Control systems.

g. Communication systems.

h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.

i. Conveying systems.

j. Electrical wiring systems.

k. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in

reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or

decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not

limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.


c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.

d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.

e. Equipment supports.

f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner

that would, in Engineer's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and

replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved

in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential

interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before

proceeding.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent

possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will provide a match acceptable to Engineer for the visual and functional performance of

in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate

and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical

systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,

and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public

utilities serving Project site.


B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where

indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the

Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding

with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control

of Contractor, submit a request for information to Engineer according to requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are

discovered, notify Engineer and Construction Manager promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.


2. Establish limits on use of Project site.

3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions.

4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.

6. Notify Engineer and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and

levels exceed allowable tolerances.

7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill

and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and

electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.

Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and

duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log

available for reference by Engineer and Construction Manager.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control

points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written

approval of Engineer or Construction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent

benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent

benchmarks or control points to Engineer and Construction Manager before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base

replacements on the original survey control points.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces.


B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction

items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated

requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size

and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with

other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size

and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Engineer.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.

Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their

original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not

to void existing warranties.


C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be

exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free

passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to

requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before

cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply

with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as

practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching

and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and

appearance.


a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and

intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final

paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional

coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,

mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by

Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for

Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable

timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual

construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation

conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend

preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of

the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if

the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors

are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.


C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials

down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious

exposure during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation

without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements."


3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,

but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.

5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.

2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.


1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in

other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and

corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why

the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days

prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below

that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction

permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.

Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project

record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction

photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar

final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,

workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar

documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,

spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by

Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where

applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of

maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item

and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Construction

Manager's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days

prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below

that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.

3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.

4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.


5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in

Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders.

8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a

minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and

tests. On receipt of request, Engineer and Construction Manager will either proceed with

inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate

of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on

Contractor's list or additional items identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected

before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final

completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment

Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer's Substantial

Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed

and dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been

completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage

complying with insurance requirements.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of

10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On

receipt of request, Engineer and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or

notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for

Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or

corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.


1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by

construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if

necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Engineer and Construction Manager.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Engineer, through Construction Manager, will return annotated

file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of

the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is

indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during

construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project

Manual.

1. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty

and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling

navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous

to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.


1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not

applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum

allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution

regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other

foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other

foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured

surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original

condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.

Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign

substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.


o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.

Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of

Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective

parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly

adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,

provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified

condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other

damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including

mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and

identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede

operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and

noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for

new fixtures.


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Product maintenance manuals.

5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation

and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed

manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Engineer will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are

acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions

and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.

Submit on digital media acceptable to Engineer.


a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable

item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance

directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing

demonstration and training. Engineer will comment on whether general scope and content of

manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for

Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.

Engineer will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit copies of

each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments and prior to

commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance

data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired

information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation

and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance

manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the

Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to

ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building

Systems."


2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.

3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name and contact information for Contractor.

6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.

7. Name and contact information for Engineer.

8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.

9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that designed the

systems contained in the manuals.

10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to

the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project

Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each

volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic

PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable

file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file

names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names

used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and

subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so

that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily

navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening

file.


2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.

2. Emergency instructions.

3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.

4. Water leak.

5. Power failure.

6. Water outage.

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for

notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and

equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams.

8. Piped system diagrams.

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:


1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,

and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation

or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:


1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and

related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service

contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or

schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine

maintenance and service with standard time allotment.


1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local

sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides

an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies

indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or

component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,

identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data

applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or

systems.


F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to

ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839

"Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and

maintenance documentation.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,


1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.

4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints.

2) Engineer will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three set(s) of

prints.

2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications,

including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.


1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,

submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-

keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit

annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record

documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions,

field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop

Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,

whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide

information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Depths of foundations below first floor.

d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

g. Actual equipment locations.

h. Duct size and routing.

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.

j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

k. Changes made following Engineer's written orders.

l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.


3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use

personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record

prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted

from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings

where Engineer determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are

suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting

an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Engineer and Construction Manager for proper scale and scope of detailing and

notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other

construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets;

comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on

cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.

3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet

identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."

d. Name of Engineer.

e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.


4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where

applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and

title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file

miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section

number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project

record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they

occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record

documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,

dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record

documents for Engineer's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,


1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,

including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of

instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and

outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and

training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording

of live instructional module.

B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of

instruction time.

C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and

documentation of performance-based test.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating

maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for

this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful

learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and

maintenance procedures and training.


C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing

demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction.

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions

and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction

time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data

has been reviewed and approved by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules

for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification

Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a

description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each

module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or

component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

c. Operating standards.

d. Regulatory requirements.

e. Equipment function.

f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.


h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.

b. Operations manuals.

c. Maintenance manuals.

d. Project record documents.

e. Identification systems.

f. Warranties and bonds.

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures.

g. Instructions on stopping.

h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies.

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

c. Noise and vibration adjustments.

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:


a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.

f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training

module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with

requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,

to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of

participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Construction Manager, with at least seven days'

advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully

operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation

and maintenance data submittals.


E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove

instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial

training use.


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033001 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Interior concrete slabs on metal deck.

2. Concrete encasement and beam pocket infill.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-

furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

B. Building Construction: Specification subtitle “Building Construction” refers to all concrete

used for foundations, foundation walls, interior slabs-on-grade and exterior slabs-on-grade

related to building entrance ramps.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,

and supports for concrete reinforcement.


D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional

engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork,

shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Curing compounds.

6. Floor and slab treatments.

7. Bonding agents.

8. Adhesives.

9. Semirigid joint filler.

10. Joint-filler strips.

11. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating

compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates.

E. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified

tolerances.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified

Concrete Flatwork Technician.


B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and

equipment.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from

single source from single manufacturer.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,

"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each

entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

d. Concrete subcontractor.

e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality

control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,

curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,

forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and

anchorage device installation tolerances, concrete repair procedures, and concrete

protection.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.


B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.

C. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-

drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with

ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater

compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide

aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those

permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium

chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.


2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS (SEALER)

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of

inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates,

hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus.

b. ChemTec Int'l; ChemTec One.

c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Intraseal.

d. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula.

e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17).

f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Titan Hard.

g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard.

h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard.

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard.

j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; LIQUI-HARD.

k. Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver.

l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Duro-Nox.

m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Buff Hard.

n. US SPEC, Division of US Mix Products Company; US SPEC Industraseal.

o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS Clear.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of

floor covering (only with Engineer’s Approval).


1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Clear Cure WB.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB.

c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure & Seal 20.

d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Cure and Seal WB.

e. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Trete 309-VOC Cure & Seal.

f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-18).

g. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II.

h. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua Cure VOX;

Clearseal WB 150.

i. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Cure & Seal 309 Emulsion.

j. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.

k. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.

l. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.

m. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure.

n. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 150E.

o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.

p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 WB.

q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18

to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere

with bonding of floor covering (only with Engineer’s Approval)].

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal W.

b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.

c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; High Seal.

d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19).

e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II 20 Percent.

f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Diamond Clear VOX;

Clearseal WB STD.

g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureCure Emulsion.

h. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.

j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.

k. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 0800.

l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 200E.

m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.

n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 0800.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber

or ASTM D 1752.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a

Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.


C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or

styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit

requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet.

Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent

tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or

debris.

2.8 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor

elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,

and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended

by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match

adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended

by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.


1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of either cementitious material other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent maximum.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a

water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.45.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

2.10 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Interior Elevated Slabs on Metal Deck: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

B. Concrete Encasement for Framing Posts and Beam Pocket Infill: Proportion normal-weight

concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: 5% Maximum.

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from

1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and

delivery time to 60 minutes.


B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not

more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each

additional 1 cu. yd..

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project

identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount

of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure

can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces (Architectural Concrete).

2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to

prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous

locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.


J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and

Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face

of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and

other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does

not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50

deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by

form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day

design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without

loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply

new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete

surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and

reshoring.


1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to

distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will

induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and

provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack

weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset

laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with

wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at

locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder

intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,

near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.


6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. See drawings for recommended length between control joints for wall construction.

D. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete into

areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete

thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each

edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying

surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive

or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action

will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random

contraction cracks.

E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and

other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below

finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint

Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.

F. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate

or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of

weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.

Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.


1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6

inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that

have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time

necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other

embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature

range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete

on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing

water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of

ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete

is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified

limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.


B. Smooth-Formed Finish (Architectural Concrete): As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-

facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.

Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified

limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view to be covered with a coating or

covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish (Architectural Concrete): Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-

cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete

surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform

color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing

process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small

or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular

texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied

or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of

trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that

would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,

carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-

finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly

trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.


3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed

anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.

4. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in

place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-

place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to

complete the Work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as

shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,

complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

C. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair landings, and associated items. Cast-in

inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete

surfaces.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-

weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing

operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and

bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the

remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.


2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped

at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than

seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover

material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with

bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair

damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound

manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere

with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity

of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS (SEALER)

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor

treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and

complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 14 days old (or per Manufacturers’

Recommendations).

3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;

and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until

surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

3.13 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until

construction traffic has permanently ceased.


B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed

joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove

and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two

and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling

and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of

cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes

and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding

agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place

with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher

than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces

sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.

Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather

edges to match adjacent floor elevations.


5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low

areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor

elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,

square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.

Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.

Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without

coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.

Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and

loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to

match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's

approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and

inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Headed bolts and studs.

4. Verification of use of required design mixture.

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50

cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform

additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.


3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for

each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is

40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite

sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test

for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample. (4 cylinders minimum)

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite

sample. (4 cylinders minimum)

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens

at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures

for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 500 psi.

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain

Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete

testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive

strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking

strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of

concrete.

12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency

may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with

ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.


D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of

finishing.

3.16 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in

writing by liquid floor treatments installer.


UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Mortar and grout.

3. Steel reinforcing bars.

4. Masonry joint reinforcement.

5. Ties and anchors.

6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive

strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1

and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.



B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.

2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:


1. Exposed CMUs.

2. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations

establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

3. Reinforcing bars.

4. Joint reinforcement.

5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water

retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with

compressive strength requirement.

D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and

mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,

mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to

Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

E. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used

to comply with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source

from single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,

including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious

component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.


D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements

in the Contract Documents.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units

become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when

construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely

in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least

three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such

masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost

or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40

deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days

after completing cleaning.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units

where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-

resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent

masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces

of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Density Classification: Normal weight.

2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

2.3 MASONRY LINTELS

A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs

with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before

handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold-weather

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color

indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing

no other ingredients.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.


E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement.

b. .

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or

crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the

No. 16 sieve.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H. Water: Potable.

I. Antifreeze or accelerating compounds shall not be added to the mortar. Conform to BIA

recommendations for cold weather masonry work.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 (9 gauge) ladder type.

3. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.

4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

5. Splice joint reinforcement with minimum of 6 inch lap.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that

comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M,

Class 1 coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304.

4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating.

5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,

with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

6. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

7. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

8. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM a 666, Type 304.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1311&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456824017&mf=&src=wd


B. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6 inches

long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in

and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Post installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors as indicated.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick.

B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products

or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other

and to substrates.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-

65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall;

size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,

Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry

unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel

wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

2.10 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

A. Loose-Granular Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated

for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water

repellency and to limit dust generation).

2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without


discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by

cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. EaCo Chem, Inc.

c. ProSoCo, Inc. 101 Lime Solvent

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.

C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces

and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for

specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental

to performance of work.

2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.






3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths

indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut

units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and

textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or

minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,

3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,

1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch

in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more

than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for

warpage of units.


3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at

other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in

running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at

corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive

mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh

masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout full height under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and

similar items unless otherwise indicated.

H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof

structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above.

2. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above to comply with Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient

mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head

joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint

thickness unless otherwise indicated.


3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8

inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 24 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at[ corners,] returns,

offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or

concrete to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 2 inches wide between masonry and structural steel

or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid

materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure as

indicated.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and horizontally.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.

Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-

plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint.

Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of

sealant.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. Fully grout two

cores, full height at all bearing locations.


3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support

reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,

tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of

reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened

sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during

construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough

strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 48 inches.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections

and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to

perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified

requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-

prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,

sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for

compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to

ASTM C 780.

G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.


3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install

in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,

where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar

fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes

or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding

with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with

liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's

property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as

described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Grout.


1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures

and administrative requirements.

2. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through

deck.

3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other

metal items not defined as structural steel.

4. Division 09 Section 099000 “Painting” for painting requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or

along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and

their connections.

C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows:

1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches.

2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches.

3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches.


A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents

to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering


analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with

other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.

2. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

C. Construction: As indicated.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment drawings.

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed

and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):

Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded

joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).

2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and fabricator.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Products.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

F. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

2. Shear stud connectors.

3. Shop primers.

4. Nonshrink grout.


G. Source quality-control reports.

H. Certified Survey per Section 3.1.A.1


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical

welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8.

FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel

qualification.

B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.

3. AISC 360.

4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off

ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel

members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or

structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes

repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are

compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and

directions for installation.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural

bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened

carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished

carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. (Grade 55 as indicated).

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

4. Finish: Plain.

D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

3. Finish: Plain.

E. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: As specified in Division 09, Section 099000 “Painting”.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.


2.4 GROUT

A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate

grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for

application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate

according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and

AISC 360.

1. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.

2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected.

3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to

metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-

SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-

opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform,

square, and true members in completed wall framing.

H. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld exposed

joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure

removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than

10 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to

pass through steel framing members.


1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes

or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING AND PAINTING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and

spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and

standards:

1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming and Painting: Priming and finish painting shall be in accordance with Division 09

specification Section 099000 “Painting”.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform

shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being

fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. Refer to Division 1 Section

“Special Inspection and Testing”


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and

locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with

requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other

embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural

steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in

intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,

connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-

place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to

AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-

reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before

packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.

Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with

manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for

Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before

permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be

in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevations and alignment.


1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut

sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be

enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary

connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.


b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be

accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to

requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors

already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the

Contract Documents.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or

missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with Section

099000 “Painting” requirements.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool

cleaning.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 09 painting

Sections.


STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.


1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,

cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.

D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.


B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural

Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof

covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to

AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members."

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of

another qualified testing agency.

2.2 METAL DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following

provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be


1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.

2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.

3. CMC Joist & Deck.

4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.

5. Cordeck.

6. DACS, Inc.

7. Epic Metals Corporation.

8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.

9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.

10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.

11. Roof Deck, Inc.

12. Valley Joist; Subsidiary of EBSCO Industries, Inc.

13. Verco Manufacturing Co.

14. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1511&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456824747&mf=04&src=wd















B. Composite Metal Deck and Form Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves,

to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication

No. 31, and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, zinc

coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated.

3. Profile Depth: As indicated.

4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.

5. Span Condition: As indicated.

6. Side Laps: Overlapped.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with

requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000

psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of

profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same

material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated.

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,

finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.

I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch thick, with factory-

punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.

J. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as

deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

K. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as

deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For

drains, cut holes in the field.

L. Galvanizing Repair Paint: In accordance with Division 09, Section 099000 "Painting".

M. Repair Paint: In accordance with Division 09, Section 099000 "Painting".


N. Finish Paint: In accordance with Division 09, Section 099000 "Painting".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in

SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned

and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract

side-lap interlocks.

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting

panels.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting

through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,

continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical

fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds or arc seam

welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.


2. Weld Spacing: 36/4 pattern. Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of

two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated.

3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between

supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches, and as follows:

1. 5/8” puddle welds at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2

inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.

D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end

closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld

to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated.

Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete

closure.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and

Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

corrected work with specified requirements.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck

with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: In accordance with Division 09, Section 099000 "Painting".


METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

2. Metal ladders.

3. Ladder safety cages.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not

specified in other Sections.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033001 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,

slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items

built into unit masonry.

3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."

1.3 COORDINATION


and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.

Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,

concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in

concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

2. Metal ladders.

3. Ladder safety cages.

4. Loose steel lintels.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,


B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,

ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

"Steel Bolts and Nuts" Paragraph below specifies weathering steel bolts and nuts.


B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts,

ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,

where indicated, flat washers.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: chemical anchors.


ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000 "Painting." Universal Shop

Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with

MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033001 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-

weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed

surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or

welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.


G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,

and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally

welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch

hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise

indicated.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the Work.

2.6 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.

2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.

3. Rungs: 1-inch-diameter steel bars.

4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-

oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled

with aluminum-oxide grout.

6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar

grating, supported by steel angles.

7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or

bolted steel brackets.

8. Prime and paint ladders in accordance with Section 099000 "Painting."

2.7 LADDER SAFETY CAGES

A. General:

1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with

stainless-steel fasteners.


2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet o.c.

Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches o.c. between

primary hoops.

3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or with

stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages:

1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch flat bar hoops.

2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch flat bar hoops.

3. Vertical Bars: 3/16-by-1-1/2-inch flat bars secured to each hoop.

4. Prime and paint ladders in accordance with Section 099000 "Painting."

2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and

recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for

each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit

where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span,

but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from

concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than

two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into

surrounding surface.

2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on

fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. Prime and paint in accordance with

Section 099000 "Painting."

2.12 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,

including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.


B. Anchor supports securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders

with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of

pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or

masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column

baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and

leveled.

2.13 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have

been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if

protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack

grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

2.14 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099000 "Painting."


METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 1

SECTION 055119 - METAL GRATING STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes industrial-type, straight-run stairs with steel-grating treads and railings

attached to metal grating stairs.

1.3 COORDINATION


and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are

compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to



A. Product Data: For metal grating stairs and the following:

1. Paint products.

2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..

3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above.

5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or

ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

D. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510.

E. Cast-Abrasive Nosings: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of

aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior

walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,

ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to

six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed

when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M,

conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.





A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000 "Painting."

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, clips, brackets, bearing

plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on

supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

C. Weld connections to comply with the following:




3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with

minimal splatter.

D. Fabricate joints that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes

where water may accumulate.

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for

Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Industrial Class, unless

more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as

indicated.

3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers.

C. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar

grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

1. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."


D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with

galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise

indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and

Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary

for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and

masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from

established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.

B. Set steel-stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned

and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off

flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.



abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099000 " Painting".


PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe railings.

1.3 COORDINATION


and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to


C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support

railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Railing brackets.

3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,

posts, and balusters, including finish.

2. Fittings and brackets.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under

conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller

marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as

supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded

hanger bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage] and that provides 1-1/2-inch

clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless

another grade and weight are required by structural loads.


B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and

class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of

construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching

them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to

6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when

installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by

a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with



A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy

welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000 "Painting".

C. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 099000

"Painting".

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to

support structural loads.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units

for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of

joined pieces.


C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed

surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide

weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings

designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.




3. Remove flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Form Changes in Direction as Follows:

1. By bending.

J. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each

repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend

without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,

and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry

work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.

Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside

dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate

forming bottom closure.

P. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized

for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not

more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist

being dislodged.


1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing

sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.

Q. Expanded-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from expanded metal made from same

R. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of

open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,

fasteners, and sleeves; however, galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or

masonry.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-

SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise

indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of

Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or

masonry.

D. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099000 "Painting."

1. Color: As selected by Novelis from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in

location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished

after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means

without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.


1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in

contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for

securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.

Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is

performed in the shop or in the field.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted

into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout,

mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by

conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

C. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.



abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099000 "Painting."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective

coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial

Completion.


PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1

SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plastic sheet paneling.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING

A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels

complying with ASTM D 5319.


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. Crane Composites, Inc.

b. Glasteel.

c. Marlite.

d. Newcourt, Inc.

e. Nudo Products, Inc.

f. Parkland Plastics, Inc.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency

according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable

testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

3. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm).

4. Surface Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=7578

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457003362






PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and

cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed

to conceal edges.


B. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by

plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and

dust.

B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to

manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not

less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails.

D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim

in a bead of sealant.

E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by

sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Product test reports.

B. Preconstruction laboratory test reports.

C. Preconstruction field-adhesion-test reports.

D. Field-adhesion-test reports.

E. Sample warranties.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing

indicated.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated

below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.


1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific

joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint

sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to

Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.



the following:

a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.

B. Silicone, S, P, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 100 percent and minus 50

percent movement capability traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.



the following:

a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.

b. Pecora Corporation.

c. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.








2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),

and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum

sealant performance.



the following:

a. Alcot Plastics Ltd.

b. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.

c. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces.






3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation

instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing

begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling

agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or

adjacent surfaces.

1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of

sealant and joint substrate.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.

Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated

requirements.

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.


1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: S.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry, walls, and partitions.

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: S.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.


HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.


1. Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" for door hardware for

hollow-metal doors.

2. Section 088000 “Glazing” for glazing installed in hollow metal window frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance

ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

7. Details of accessories.


8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

10. For "Doors" and "Frames" subparagraphs below, prepare Samples approximately 12 by

12 inches (305 by 305 mm) to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of

materials and construction:

a. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and

hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing

glazing if applicable.

b. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include

separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if applicable.

C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests

performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit

and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded

to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum

4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each

stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld International, LLC.

2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.

3. Pioneer Industries, Inc.

4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.







2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based

on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and

labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance

with NFPA 105.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3..

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).

c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch

(1.3 mm).

d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.

e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's

discretion.

f. Core: Kraft-paper honeycomb.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.0625 inch

b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not

less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2

inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177

inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042

inch (1.0 mm) thick.


B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0

mm), and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable

for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of

scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating

designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for

attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting

of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-

developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion

characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film

thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur

components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,

fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly

identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:


1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel

vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical

webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more

than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber

insulation.

2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51

mm).

3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face

sheets.

4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of

same material as face sheets.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal

as frames.

1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated

from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt

welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be

grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per

anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at

bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match

coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.

3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.

4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as

follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.

3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.

4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers

as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.


b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to

SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where

indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-

metal work.

2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors

and frames.

3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.

4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation

types indicated.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;

compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Louvers: Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111C,

with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into

0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame.

1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted-V or inverted-Y blades.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame

installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,

filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed

faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in

place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with

SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving

surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.

e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

3. Exterior Walls: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:


a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal

line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified

below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32

inch (0.8 mm).

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or

minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

c. At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch (19.1 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.8 mm)] plus or minus 1/32

inch (0.8 mm).

d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or

minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-

metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not

more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each

corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after

installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint

according to manufacturer's written instructions.


DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATION) 087111 - 1

SECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATION)

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.


1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of

hollow-metal frames.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details,

material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and

diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work

to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions

of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door

hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the

fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as

in the Contract Documents.

c. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each

door and frame.

2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor

plans and to door and frame schedule.

3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,

function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.


4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.

5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

6) Mounting locations for door hardware.

7) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and

frame.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's

final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key

set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, from the manufacturer.

1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors

complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of

comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,

for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include

final hardware and keying schedule.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved

by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the

course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and

keying.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.

2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.

C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch.

Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with

ICC/ANSI A117.1.


1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the

wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to

door.

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more

than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door

will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured

to the leading edge of the door.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to

Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door

hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with

each item or package.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory

prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for

locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing

construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing

conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to

provide proper door operation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise

indicated.


a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article

to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule"

Article. Products are identified by descriptive titles corresponding to requirements specified in

Part 2.

2.2 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal

doors and hollow-metal frames.



the following:

a. Hager Companies.

b. Lawrence Hardware Inc.

c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.

B. Antifriction-Bearing Hinges:

1. Mounting: Full mortise (butts).

2. Bearing Material: Ball bearing.

3. Grade: Grade 1 (heavy weight).

4. Base and Pin Metal:

a. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless-steel pin.

b. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless-steel pin.

c. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel with stainless-steel pin.

5. Pins: Non-rising loose unless otherwise indicated.

a. Outswinging Exterior Doors: Nonremovable.

b. Outswinging Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable.

6. Tips: Flat button.

7. Corners: Square.







2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire

doors, and as follows:

1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) latchbolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Cast.

2. Escutcheons (Roses): Cast.

3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

4. Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses).

E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with

requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended

to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer.

F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.



the following:

a. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.

2.4 AUTOMATIC AND SELF-LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS

A. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw;

designed for mortising into door edge.



the following:

a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

B. Automatic Flush Bolts: Grade 1, fabricated from steel and brass components, with spring-

activated bolts that automatically retract when active leaf is opened and that automatically

engage when active door depresses bolt trigger; listed and labeled for fire-rated doors. Provide

brass or stainless-steel cover plate, top and bottom matching dustproof strikes, guides, guide

supports, wear plates, and shims.

C. Self-Latching Flush Bolts: Grade 1, fabricated from steel and brass components, with spring-

activated bolts that automatically engage when active door depresses trigger; listed and labeled

for fire-rated doors. Bolts are manually retracted by a slide in the bolt face. Provide brass or






stainless-steel cover plate, matching dustproof top and bottom strikes, guides, guide supports,

wear plates, and shims.

D. Dustproof Strikes: Grade 1, polished wrought brass, with 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, spring-

tension plunger.

2.5 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS

A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.



the following:

a. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

C. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection,

based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

D. Surface Vertical-Rod Exit Devices: Grade 1.

1. Type: Type 2.

2. Grade: Grade 1.

3. Actuating Bar: Cross bar.

4. Material: Stainless steel.

5. Configuration: Top rod.

E. Exit Device Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless


1. Match design for lock trim, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Through-Bolt Fasteners: For exit devices and trim on metal doors.

2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.



the following:

a. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.

B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are interchangeable;

face finished to match lockset.

1. Number of Pins: Six.






2. Type: Bored-lock type.

C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.

Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.7 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,

Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

1. Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate

cylinders.

2. Existing System:

a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include

the following notation:

a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.

b. Master Keys: Ten.

c. Grand Master Keys: Ten

2.8 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.



the following:

a. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.

b. Hager Companies.

c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.

B. Flat Push Plates: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, 4 inches wide by 16 inches high (102 mm wide by

406 mm high) with square corners and beveled edges; secured with exposed screws.

C. Push-Pull Plates: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, 3-1/2 inches wide by 15-3/4 inches high (89 mm

wide by 400 mm high) with square corners, beveled edges, and raised integral lip; secured with

exposed screws.






2.9 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS

A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf

release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable

safety release.

B. plate for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.

C. Overlapping-with-Gasket Astragals: BHMA A156.22; T-shaped metal, surface mounted on

edge of door with screws; with integral gasket and base metal as follows:

1. Base Metal: Stainless steel.

2. Gasket Material: Vinyl.

2.10 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and

latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door,

exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable

to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.



the following:


B. Surface Closer with Cover: Grade 1; Modern Type with mechanism enclosed in cover.

1. Mounting: Parallel arm.

2. Type: Regular arm.

3. Backcheck: Adjustable, effective between 60 and 85 degrees of door opening.

4. Cover Material: Plated steel.

2.11 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8.



the following:


B. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Jointed-Arm Stops: Type 3; Grade 1; release by push and pull of

door; control capable of being set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; for single-

acting doors opening 110 degrees.






2.12 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu.

m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to

ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily

available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.



the following:

a. Zero International.

B. Adjustable, Housed, Perimeter Gasketing: Screw-adjustable sponge neoprene gasket material

held in place by aluminum housing; fastened to frame stop with screws.

C. Automatic Door Bottoms: Sponge neoprene gasket material held in place by aluminum housing

that automatically drops to form seal when door is closed; mounted to bottom edge of door with

screws.

1. Mounting: Surface mounted on face of door.

2.13 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.



the following:

a. Zero International.

B. Latching/Rabbeted Thresholds with Gasket: Fluted-top metal member with gasket.

1. Type: Thermal barrier.

2. Base Metal: Aluminum.

3. Gasket Material: Closed-cell sponge neoprene.

C. Latching/Rabbeted Panic Thresholds:

1. Type: Fluted, barrier free top.

2. Base Metal: Aluminum.

2.14 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick

stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.



the following:

a. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.








b. Hiawatha, Inc.

c. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of InPro Corporation.

d. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.

B. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by door width with allowance for frame stops.

2.15 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade

name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as

otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming

method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and

hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware

units and BHMA A156.18.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared

for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially

recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not

permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door

hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Fire-Rated Applications:

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames.

2) Strike plates to frames.

3) Closers to doors and frames.

b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:

1) Surface hinges to doors.

2) Closers to doors and frames.

3) Surface-mounted exit devices.

2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and

elsewhere as indicated.

2.16 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.






C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to

minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor

construction, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames

according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless

otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface

protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes

have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than

the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30

inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of

support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction

period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.


E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant

complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door

hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

I. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to

ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to

operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating

and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE


Door Hardware Set No. 1

Locations: Interior Passage Doors to have the

following:

Qty. Item

* Hinges; A156.1; A5111

1 Exit Device; A156.3; Type 2; Function 15

1 Closer; A156.4; C02021

1

1

Perimeter Gasketing; A156.22; R0Y154

Door Sweep; A156.22; R0Y416

1

*Number of hinges,

as specified

Kick Plate; A156.6; J102x10”

Wall/Floor Stop


Locations: Control Room Door to have the

following:

Qty. Item

* Hinges; A156.1; A5111

1 Lock Set; A156.13; Function 02

1 Closer; A156.4; C02021

1

1



1

*Number of hinges,

as specified


Wall / Floor Stop


Locations: Break Room and Toilet Room

Doors to have the following:

Qty. Item

* Hinges; A156.1; A5111

1

1

1

Push Pate; A156.6; J304

Pull Plate; A156.6; J407

Pull; A156.6: J401

1 Closer; A156.4; C02021

1

1



1


Wall / Floor Stop


*Number of hinges,

as specified


Locations: Mechanical Room door to have

the following:

Qty. Item

* Hinges; A156.1; A5111

2

2

Lock Set; A156.13; Grade 1, Function 07 Active Leaf /

Function 01 Inactive leaf

Manual Flush Bolts; A156.16; L04081

1 Coordinator and carry-open bar; A156.3;

1

1

Astragal; A156.22


1 Door Sweep; A156.22; R0Y416

1 Threshold; A156.21; J36190


GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for windows.

2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and

face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12

inches (300 mm) square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant,

gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with

elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant

products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

GLAZING 088000 - 2

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace glazing units that deteriorate

within specified warranty period. Deterioration of glazing is defined as defects developed from

normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning glass

contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other

indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.

2. Cardinal Glass Industries.

3. Cristacurva.

4. Dlubak Corporation.

5. Gardner Glass, Inc.

6. GGI; General Glass International.

7. Glasswerks LA, Inc.

8. GTI; Glaz-Tech Industries.

9. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard.

10. Hartung Glass Industries.

11. JE Berkowitz, LP.

12. Northwestern Industries, Inc.

13. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.

14. Pilkington North America.

15. PPG Flat Glass; PPG Industries, Inc.

16. Schott North America, Inc.

17. Tecnoglass.

18. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC.

19. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.

20. Viracon, Inc.


A. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated

below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.






















GLAZING 088000 - 3

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)

unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

2.5 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a

dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seals.

2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to the following:

1) Technoform Glass Insulation NA, Inc.

2) Thermix; a brand of Ensinger USA.

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,

including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,

under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer

based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at

time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.



the following:





GLAZING 088000 - 4

a. Dow Corning Corporation.

b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.

c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.

d. Pecora Corporation.

e. Sika Corporation.

f. Tremco Incorporated.

2.7 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric

tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer

rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and

complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.

3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant

performance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from

Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge






GLAZING 088000 - 5

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or

impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to

requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to

make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and

GLAZING 088000 - 6

installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners

and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without

developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket

manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-

glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass

lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding

into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and

backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance

for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of

dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,

remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.

2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

B. Evaluation reports for post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners.


A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing

members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Steel Framing

Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified

according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.


1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless


2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized unless


B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Tracks:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.

2) Custom Stud.

3) MarinoWARE.

4) MBA Building Supplies.

5) MRI Steel Framing, LLC.

6) Phillips Manufacturing Co.

7) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.

8) Steel Network, Inc. (The).

9) Telling Industries.

b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for

horizontal deflection.

c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by

the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1) Blazeframe Industries.

2) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.

3) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

4) MarinoWARE.

5) MBA Building Supplies.

6) Metal-Lite.

7) Perfect Wall, Inc.

8) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.

9) Steel Network, Inc. (The).

10) Telling Industries.























2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC58 or AC308 as appropriate for the

substrate.

a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure.

b. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anchor.

c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless


d.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in

diameter.

D. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal

thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.367 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely

fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.


E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports

or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at

suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in

finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3.3 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by

building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.


a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension

system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of

trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,

and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.

5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms.

6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3

mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely

between parallel members that will receive finishes.


GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.



B. Samples: For each texture finish indicated on same backing indicated for Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



the following:

a. American Gypsum.

b. CertainTeed Corporation.

c. Continental Building Products, LLC.

d. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.

e. National Gypsum Company.

f. PABCO Gypsum.

g. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific.

h. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

3. Long Edges: Tapered.











B. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M gypsum board, tested according to

ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.



the following:

a. American Gypsum.

b. CertainTeed Corporation.

c. Continental Building Products, LLC.

d. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.

e. National Gypsum Company.

f. PABCO Gypsum.

g. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific.

h. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.

3. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements.

4. Indentation: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements.

5. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements.

6. Long Edges: Tapered.

7. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. Bullnose bead.

c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.

f. Expansion (control) joint.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.











1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,

use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

B. Comply with ASTM C 840.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim

edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting

structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for

panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 5: All other remaining areas.


a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior

Painting."

H. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for

use as exposed soffit board.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each

other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Product test reports.

C. Research reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.


2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS



1. American Gypsum.

2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

3. CertainTeed Corporation.

4. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

5. Rockfon (Roxul Inc.).

6. Tectum Inc.

7. United States Gypsum Company.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264.

C. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as

follows:

1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish, Form 2, water felted.

2. Pattern: CD (perforated, small holes and fissured).

D. Color: White.

E. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.82.

F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 40.

G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than .55.

H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

I. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).

J. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm).

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM







B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension

system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.















2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

B. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down.

C. Impact Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-clip system designed to absorb impact forces

against acoustical panels.

D. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical panels in

place during a seismic event.

2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM






4. Fry Reglet Corporation.

5. Gordon, Inc.


B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with

seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that

used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless


B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M, seismic design

requirements, and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.









1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

3. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.


RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl base.

2. Vinyl molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL BASE




2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc.

3. Flexco.

4. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.

5. Roppe Corporation, USA.

6. VPI Corporation.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).

2. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: As indicated on drawings.

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.









H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product

manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-

tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are

to be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

products.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.


G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would

otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.


PAINTING 099000 - 1

SECTION 099000 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior and

exterior substrates.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

E. Novelis Paint Schedule for each coating.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.

PAINTING 099000 - 2


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5

deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Refer to Appendix A – 1000.70.10 Novelis Facilities Paint Standard

PART 3 - EXECUTION


1. Work performed by the Contractor is subject at all times to inspection by a Novelis

Representative.

2. Forms included in Appendix are to be utilized for Daily Inspections.

Refer to Appendix A – 1000.70.10 Novelis Facilities Paint Standard


PAINTING 099000 - 3

APPENDIX A

1000-70.10 NOVELIS FACILITIES PAINT STANDARD

NOVELIS 1000.70.10 Novelis Facilities Paint Standard

1

• Part Number: 1000.70.10 • Title: Novelis Facilities Paint Standard • Standard Series: 1000.70.10.XX • Revision Number: 3 • Date of Revision: April 6, 2012 • Applicable Standards: SSPC/ASTM/NACE/ICRI/ISOHS Machine Guarding

Table of Contents

1. PURPOSE ........................................................................................................................................ 2

2. SCOPE .............................................................................................................................................. 2

3. DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................ 2

4. CODES AND STANDARDS .......................................................................................................... 3

5. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 3

6. SURFACE PREPARATION .......................................................................................................... 4

7. MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................... 9

8. PAINT APPLICATION ............................................................................................................... 12

9. PAINT SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................................... 14

10. QUALITY ASSURANCE-INSPECTION ..................... ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.

11. APPENDIX A PAINT SCHEDULE ......................................................................................... 20

12. APPENDIX B COATING DAILY PROJECT INSPECTION REPORT .............................. 21

http://portal.insidenovelis.com/dept/EHS/pages/Reference%20Library/Performance%20Standards/Novelis%20Inc/Machine%20Safeguarding.aspx


2

1. PURPOSE 1.1 This global engineering standard for painting of new and existing facilities recommends

acceptable materials, surface preparation procedures, and provides general application and inspection for painting for corrosion protection and maintenance of buildings, equipment and concrete.

2. SCOPE 2.1 This specification covers the recommendations for new and existing facilities surface

preparation, corrosion protection and physical appearance of buildings, equipment and concrete and intermittent molten metal exposure (spills) up to 750°C in remelt and casting applications.

2.2 This specification provides guidelines for all new installations and field painting of Novelis owned and operated facilities worldwide. This document was created to assist plant personnel with a reference for coating applications and industry best practices. Plant personnel should utilize and reference based on their experience and judgment obtained in successful coating applications. Exceptions to this document should be communicated to the author for revision of the standard if required ([email protected]).

3. DEFINITIONS

Cementitious Having the properties of cement; construction material with cement binder (i.e. concrete, concrete block, plaster, stucco, brick, etc.)

DFT Dry Film Thickness – The thickness of the paint layer after it has completely cured.

Drift Small airborne paint droplets carried by airflow away from the intended surface.

DTM Direct To Metal – A paint which can be applied directly to the surface and does not require separate primer.

Kit The paint plus activators in whole containers of the correct mixing quantities as supplied by the manufacturer.

Novelis Representative

Novelis employee or Novelis designated person that is responsible for the work performed.

Primer A paint which provides good adhesion to bare metal and corrosion protection. Primer paints should be covered with other paints of greater durability

Profile The average peak-to-valley depth that is created during surface preparation.

Overspray The sprayed paint which misses the desired surface.

Runs and Sags Surface irregularities related to the flow of wet paint, caused by excess application quantity.

Sand Use sand paper or flexible disk to clean and smooth a surface.

Touchup Correction of small defects in the applied paint. The surface preparation and painting of small areas.


3

4. CODES AND STANDARDS • Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC) • American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International ) • International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) • National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE International) • International Organization for Standardization (ISO) • Aluminum Association (AA)

5. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 5.1 Preparation, application, quality, and documentation requirements described herein apply

to all paint systems. Provisions of this section apply to painting and repainting of structures, equipment and cementitious surfaces, except as noted.

5.2 All coating applications should consist of approved paint systems, appropriate surface preparation techniques andmaterials, as specified or approved per Novelis Representative.

5.3 Contractors bidding for maintenance painting work should complete and submit a Paint Schedule (Example - Appendix A, Paint Schedule) or similar form along with their bids. Before the contract is awarded, the painting contractor and the appropriate Novelis Representative should inspect and test the site to determine if lead paint is present. If lead paint is present, the contractor shall comply with OSHA 1926.62.

5.4 Casting surfaces in Remelt areas have special requirements. Coating surfaces in this application shall follow the Aluminum Association’s “Guidelines for the Handling of Molten Metal”.

5.4.1 Metal Casting Surfaces (including steel, stainless steel, aluminum, etc.) in Remelt/Casting Operations – All steel and other metallic surfaces below the casting mold with possible water and liquid metal contact, including tilt frame/rolling carriage. This excludes heat transfer surfaces like the starting head or mold itself and greased/lubricated surfaces such as pit guides. Stainless steel is not an explosion-proof surface. Only properly coated surfaces are explosion-proof for common molten aluminum alloys.

5.4.2 Cementitious Casting Surfaces in Remelt/Casting Operations – All such surfaces below the casting mold with possible water and liquid metal contact, including casting pit walls.

5.5 Exclusions 5.5.1 The following materials shall not be painted unless required by project-specific

documents or local, regional, or federal regulations. • Aluminum, copper, or brass surfaces (excluding molten metal applications) • Stainless steel (excluding molten metal applications) • Heat transfer devices and surfaces used during molten metal casting (molds,

starting heads, caster rolls and belts, etc.) • Sliding or rolling metal surfaces (which are usually greased) such as DC casting

pit guide rails • Other corrosion-resistant surfaces • Plastic or Cement Roofing and Siding • Plastic Pipe or Equipment

5.5.2 Corrosion protection under fireproofing shall be performed in accordance with the recommendations of the fireproofing manufacturer.


4

5.5.3 If the equipment is intended to be part of a larger assembly with a different paint system and the two are incompatible, a suitable barrier coat will be specified by the Novelis representative.

5.5.4 Nameplates and instrumentation shall be protected from paint. 5.5.5 Machined surfaces required for mounting or precision positioning shall not be

painted. These surfaces shall be preserved to prevent rusting during shipment and storage before commissioning.

6. SURFACE PREPARATION 6.1 General

6.1.1 All surfaces that will be painted must be correctly prepared before painting to ensure proper coating adherence. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free of visible contaminants. Surface profile roughness to be appropriate for coating to be used.

6.1.2 It is understood that frequently a combination of several cleaning methods and procedures will be utilized to attain the desired surface preparation. It is the finished condition and surface to be coated that is of importance. Refer to SSPC–SP COM “Surface Preparation Commentary for Steel and Concrete Substrates” for general information regarding the standards of surface preparation.

6.1.3 No surface preparation shall be done under unfavorable weather conditions unless the work is adequately protected from such conditions and then only with specific approval of Novelis.

6.1.4 Reference SSPC-TU 4 “Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Substrates”.

6.1.5 Removal of Soluble Salts- A surface contamination analysis test (SCAT) shall be performed by means of a Bresle Cell /SCAT Kit on all surfaces to be painted. Surfaces with Chloride levels exceeding 3 ųg/cm² (micrograms per square centimeter) for submerged surfaces and 5 ųg/cm² for atmospheric exposed surfaces shall be treated with a liquid soluble salt remover equal to CHLOR*RID® as manufactured by CHLOR*RID International, Chandler, AZ. CHLOR*RID shall be applied by pressure washing at a minimum of 3,000 psi using 1 gallon of CHLOR*RID for each 100 gallons of potable water. A backflow preventative device shall be installed in the water supply line. The pressure washer is to be equipped with a 0° to 15° nozzle which shall be held 4” to 10” from the surface. The wash solution shall be applied initially at a rate of 600 ft² to 800 ft² per 100 gallons. After an area of approximately 100 square feet has been washed, the surface shall be re-tested for chloride contamination. Based on the test result, the application rate and dilution ratio of the wash solution may require adjustment in order to attain the specified degree of cleanliness.

6.1.6 If the equipment or materials to be painted have been exposed to any significant rain, snow, industrial use, or have been otherwise soiled, all surfaces shall be washed and rinsed before starting surface preparation and coating application. • The washing shall be performed with an alkaline detergent solution such as

trisodium phosphate cleaner, or equal. This solution can be applied with a high-pressure washer (3,000 or 5,000 psi), airless sprayer or conventional sprayer.

• The entire surface shall then have a high-pressure fresh water rinse. • All silicone sealants and adhesives shall be removed from around equipment

panels. Surfaces where mildew is present shall be cleaned with a combination of water washing, scraping, and wire brushing.


5

6.1.7 Before surface preparation begins, all surfaces that are not to be painted shall be masked or covered and protected from contamination. This protection shall be maintained throughout surface preparation and painting. For example, items to be masked and not painted include the following: • Machined gasket surfaces • Openings to piping and vessels • Moving components such as valve stems, bearings, door latches, etc. • Fasteners which will be periodically removed (i.e. inspection doors, filter covers,

etc.) 6.1.8 The specified surface preparation standards must be maintained until all areas are

prime painted. The use of grease, including Vaseline or other petroleum jelly, as a protective coating is prohibited.

6.1.9 All loose rust, loose mill scale, weld splatter, rough weld areas, slag, and sharp edges shall be chipped or ground off to SSPC-SP 3 or SSPC-SP 11.

6.1.10 All oils, greases, tars, salts, and similar materials shall be removed before blasting according to the requirements of SSPC-SP 1. Solvents containing chlorides shall not be used on stainless steels.

6.1.11 Final surface preparation requirements are defined by the paint system being used, as specified in Section 9, Table 4.

6.1.12 In preparation for painting new equipment that will not be insulated, the surface shall be abrasive blast cleaned to a minimum of SSPC SP 6. Reference photos are provided by SSPC in document VIS-1, SP-6 section, photos B, C, and D.

6.1.13 Surfaces of carbon steel equipment that will be insulated and require paint shall be near-white metal blast cleaned to SSPC SP 10. The surface profile shall be 38–50 µm (1.5 to 2 mil), unless otherwise indicated in the coating manufacturer's data sheets. When abrasive blasting is not possible, the surface may be prepared by mechanical power tool cleaning according to SSPC SP 11. This will produce a surface equal to that of a near-white metal blast. • Stainless steel that requires painting shall be cleaned in accordance with the

coating manufacturer's data sheets and recommendations. When abrasive blasting stainless steels, the blast material shall be chloride free.

• Touchups (including galvanized surfaces) and maintenance painting requiring spot priming only shall be hand or power tool cleaned according to SSPC SP 2 or SSPC SP 3. Sand the edges of the existing coating to taper the thickness and thereby make for a smooth transition with the new paint.

• Buildings and panels requiring repainting shall be cleaned according to SSPC SP 2.

• If abrasive blasting is not required or permitted, power tool cleaning shall be used. Power tool cleaning shall be according to SSPC-SP 11, SSPC-SP 3, and photos B SP 3/PWB and C SP 3/PWB of SSPC-VIS 3.

6.1.14 Any abrasive blasting conducted in the field shall be subject to the following requirements: • If abrasive blasting is required, soluble salts and chlorides on the surfaces to be

painted shall be tested before and after blasting. Consult with the coating manufacturer for acceptable levels before coating.

• All field abrasive blasting operations necessary to prepare steel surfaces for painting shall be performed, when possible, within the confines of a designated area, or off site.


6

• All equipment, tools, materials, and supplies required for the performance with this work must be installed or stored in this area.

• Protect all steel delivered to the area of operations from physical damage or distortion before and during the blast cleaning process and for the duration of the temporary storage period after surfaces have been prepared.

• The compressed air used for blasting shall be free of detrimental amounts water and oil. Adequate traps and separators must be supplied.

• Wet sand blasting or “slurry blasting “may be utilized for dust suppression and to aid in contaminate removal. Rust inhibitors shall be used during slurry blasting, that are compatible with the coating material. Consult the manufacturer. The recommendation found in SSPC-TR2 “Wet Abrasive Blast Cleaning” shall be followed.

• Spot abrasive blasting of visible rust will be performed with a size #4 nozzle only. This minimizes the impact off the blasting on the surrounding area and the amount of clean up required.

• The ground shall be covered. Local, regional, and national governmental offices shall be consulted for restrictions.

• Storm drains to be covered so that no water or debris goes down the drains. • The contractor must obtain the necessary work permits when working over

process vents. • The contractor shall use only an abrasive blast media that has been approved by

the owner or Novelis Representative. Because of possible severe health implications, there shall be no silica sand used for any abrasive blasting operations.

• The responsible Environmental, Health, and Safety Contract representative shall be consulted for permits and authorized waste disposal methods for used blast media.

6.1.15 If blast-cleaning reveals a defect in the material of any structural or pressure containing component, such as cracks, pitting, or weld porosity, the Novelis Representative shall be promptly contacted. No coatings shall be applied until Novelis Representative has explicitly accepted the defect or its repair.

6.1.16 High-Pressure Water Cleaning (HP WC) will be performed at pressures from 5,000 to 10,000 psi.

6.1.17 Any detergents or other types of cleaners used in conjunction with water jetting shall be removed from the surfaces prior to applying coating.

6.1.18 Water Jetting can be destructive to nonmetallic surfaces. Soft wood, insulation, electric installations, and instrumentation must be protected from direct and indirect water streams.

6.1.19 Self-rotating or “spin” nozzles will be used for hydro blasting.

6.2 New Unprimed Carbon Steel 6.2.1 All unprimed carbon steel surfaces to be coated shall be abrasive blasted as per

SSPC-SP6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning” (Section 6.8, Table 1). 6.2.2 Field touch-up of new steel installed surfaces shall be cleaned as per SSPC-SP11

“Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal” (Section 6.8, Table 1).

6.3 Shop Primed Carbon Steel 6.3.1 All primed surfaces shall be cleaned as per SSPC-SP1, SSPC-SP2, SSPC-SP3,

(Section 6.8, Table 1), as appropriate for the condition of the surface, prior to any further application of finish coats.


7

6.4 Concrete Surfaces 6.4.1 Concrete surfaces will be prepared as per SSPC-SP13-“Surface Preparation of

Concrete” and coated as per SSPC-Guide 11 “Guide for Coating Concrete”. These specifications address surface preparation, new and existing concrete, application of coatings and inspection.

6.4.2 Molten metal and Casting Applications – Refer to the Aluminum Association’s “Guidelines for Handling of Molten Metal” and Wisechem E-212F Product Data Sheets.

6.5 Masonry Block 6.5.1 Remove all contaminants such as dirt, grease, oil, chemicals or dust (Sections 6.1.17

thru 6.1.20). 6.5.2 Inspect all mortar joints. Unsound, eroded, soft, or missing mortar shall be removed

to the full depth of penetration and sound surfaces encountered. Repair with one part Portland cement and two parts clean mason’s sand.

6.6 Galvanized Steel 6.6.1 Remove all grease, oil, dirt, or other foreign matter by solvent or detergent cleaning

per SSPC-SP1 (Section 6.8, Table 1). 6.6.2 Remove all white rust, and other loose detrimental material. 6.6.3 New galvanized steel to be painted should not be water quenched or chromate

treated after galvanizing. This needs to be addressed when specifying the galvanized steel.

6.7 Wooden Surfaces 6.7.1 Epoxy coating systems are not to be applied to bare wood. Refer to Section 9, Tables

3 & 4, for appropriate acrylic coating systems.

6.8 Stainless Steel (Casting Applications) 6.8.1 Refer to the Aluminum Association’s “Guidelines for Handling of Molten Metal” and

Multi-gard® 955CP Product Data Sheets.

6.9 Standard Cleaning Methods

Table 1 SSPC Cleaning Methods

SP1 Solvent Cleaning Solvent cleaning is a method for removing all visible oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds and other soluble contaminants from the surface to be painted.

SP2 (St 3)

Hand Tool Cleaning

Hand tool cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust loose paint, other loose detrimental foreign material. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Mill scale, rust, and paint are considered adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife.

SP3 (St 3)

Power Tool Cleaning

Power tool cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign material. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Mill scale, rust, and paint are considered adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife.


8

SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning

A white metal blast cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter.

SP6 (NACE #3)

(Sa 2)

Commercial Blast Cleaning

Commercial blast cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining shall be limited to no more than 33% of each unit area of surface and may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coating.

SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

A brush-off blast cleaned surface when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on the surface. Mill scale, rust, and paint are considered tightly adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife.

SP10 (NACE #2) (Sa 2-1/2)

Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning

A near-white blast cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products and other foreign matter, except for random staining shall be limited to no more than 5% of each unit area of surface and may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coating.

SP11 Power Tool

Cleaning to Bare Metal

Metallic surfaces, which are prepared according to this specification, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products and other foreign matter. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in the lower portions of pits if original surface is pitted.

SP12 (NACE #5)

Surface Preparation and

Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting

Prior to Recoating

Surfaces cleaned to a WJ-4 condition shall have all loose rust, loose mill scale, and loose coatings uniformly removed. See section 3.4 for further hydro blasting details.

SP13 Surface

Preparation of Concrete

An acceptable prepared concrete surface should be free of contaminants, laitance, loosely adhering concrete, and dust and should provide a sound, uniform substrate suitable for the application of protective coating or lining systems.

Table 2 Visual Surface Preparation Definitions for Water Jetting

(NACE #5/SSPC-SP12) WJ-1 Clean to Bare Substrate: A WJ-1 surface shall be cleaned to a finish which, when viewed without magnification, is free of all visible rust, dirt, previous coatings, mill scale and foreign matter. Discoloration of the surface may be present. (A,B,C) WJ-2 Very Thorough or Substantial Cleaning: A WJ-2 surface shall be cleaned to a matte (dull, mottled) finish which, when viewed without magnification, is free of all visible oil, grease, dirt and


9

rust except for randomly dispersed stains of rust, tightly adherent thin coatings, and other tightly adherent foreign matter. The staining or tightly adherent matter is limited to a maximum of 5% of the surface. (A,B,C) WJ-3 Thorough Cleaning: A WJ-3 surface shall be cleaned to a matte (dull, mottled) finish which, when viewed without magnification, is free of all visible oil, grease, dirt and rust except for randomly dispersed stains of rust, tightly adherent thin coatings and other tightly adherent foreign matter. The staining or tightly adherent matter is limited to a maximum of 33% of the surface. (A,B,C) WJ-4 Light Cleaning: A WJ-4 surface shall be cleaned to a finish which, when viewed without magnification, is free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust and loose coating. Any residual material shall be tightly adherent.

7. MATERIALS 7.1 General

7.1.1 Solvents, thinners, and other highly volatile materials shall be stored either in unopened containers or in safety containers bearing the Underwriters Laboratories stamp of approval. Packages and containers to remain unopened until needed for application. Containers must be labeled.

7.1.2 All protective coating material shall be stored in enclosed structures to protect them from heat and/or cold in excess of the manufacturer’s recommendations 40°F to 100°F.

7.1.3 Paints and solvents shall not be stored in active control rooms, switchgear buildings, or other spark-producing areas.

7.1.4 Methyl Ethyl Ketone shall not be used as a “clean-up” solvent unless approved in writing by the EHS department.

7.1.5 All thinning and mixing shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and will be subject to inspection by a Novelis Representative.

7.1.6 The manufacturer shall supply the contractor and the Novelis Representative with Product Sheets and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). All paints applied on a given surface shall be products of the same manufacturer and used in accordance with their specified data sheets.

7.1.7 Paint shall be purchased in unbroken containers with labels and tags intact. The contractor shall mix paint in quantities equivalent to a full kit. Mixing of partial kits is prohibited. The contractor shall mix only the number of kits that will be applied within the pot-life time.

7.1.8 Additives shall be as manufactured or recommended by the manufacturer of the paint materials specified for this contract. Only the paint manufacturer's thinners and accelerators shall be used; generic brands are not permitted.

7.1.9 Paints shall be thoroughly stirred and kept at a uniform consistency during application, in accordance with the manufacturer's data sheets. Paints shall not be thinned beyond the amounts recommended by the manufacturer, as excessive thinning will reduce the film build.

7.1.10 Many paints and coatings produce vapors that can be hazardous to health or the environment; these vapors may be flammable, explosive, toxic, asphyxiating, or otherwise hazardous. The risk assessment, control, and disposal of these substances shall comply with all local, regional, and national regulations and remain the responsibility of the contractor and all of the contractor's subcontractors.


10

7.1.11 The use of large amounts of solvents to clean equipment and brushes shall be avoided, as they will become hazardous wastes. The contractor shall eliminate the use of solvents whenever possible (for example, use disposable brushes and rollers). Do not dispose of solvents that can be used for other on-site work being performed.

7.1.12 The paint brands listed in Section 7.2, Table 3 set the paint quality expectations for all Novelis plants. Alternatives suggested during the bidding process should include the Product Data Sheet and MSDS and provided to the Novelis Representative for review and approval. To include additional vendors in this standard, plant Novelis Representative should provide information to [email protected].

7.2 Paint Brands

Table 3

Paint Brands

Type Name Manufacturer Trade Name Dry Film Thickness

301 Inorganic Zinc Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Zinc Clad II Ethyl Silicate Dimetcote 9 N/A

3.0 – 5.0 As Specified

302 Penetrating Sealant Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Macropoxy 920 Pre-Prime Amerlock Sealer N/A


303 Wash Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

DTM Wash Primer ADS225 Wash Primer DuPont WP™


0.3 – 0.5

304 Epoxy Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Dura-Plate 235 Amercoat 240 Corlar 2.1 ST™


3.0 – 12.0

305 Epoxy Intermediate Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Dura-Plate 235 Amercoat 240 Corlar 2.1 ST™

4.0 – 8.0 As Specified 3.0 – 12.0

306 Polyurethane

Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

HI Solid Polyurethane MR Amercoat 450H Imron 3.5 HG™, Imron 2.1 HG™ or Imron Industrial Strength™ Topcoats


2.0 – 4.0

307 Acrylic Block Sealant Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Heavy Duty Block Filler Pitt-Glaze 16-90 BF N/A

As Required As Specified

308 Epoxy Mastic Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Macropoxy 646 Epoxy Amerlock 2/ Amercoat 385 Corlar 2.1 ST™

5.0 – 10.0 As Specified 3.0 – 12.0

309 MCU Finish Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Corothane I Finish N/A N/A

2.0 – 4.0


11

Table 3

Paint Brands


310 MCU Coal Tar (240ºF) Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Corothane I Coal Tar Keeler & Long 4600 N/A


311 Organic Zinc Epoxy Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Zinc Clad IV Amercoat 68HS N/A


312 Epoxy CUTI (450ºF) Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Cor-Cote HT Amerlock 2 GFK Corlar 2.1 HTA™


3.0 – 12.0

313 Acrylic Coating Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

DTM Acrylic Coating Pitt-Tech 90-374/474 Tufcote 1.9 HG-D™


2.0 – 5.0

314 Acrylic Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

ProBlock Primer Seal-Grip 17-921 Tufcote 1.9 HG-D™


2.0 – 5.0

315 Alkyd Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Kem Bond HS Universal Pitt-Tech+ Primer 90-912 Tufcote 3.3 PR™


2.0 – 5.0

316 Aluminum Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Corothane Mio Aluminum Speedhide 6-230 N/A


317 Acrylic Drywall Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

PrepRite 200 Speedhide 6-2 Tufcote 1.9 HG-D™


2.0 – 5.0

318 Acrylic Bonding Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

DTM Bonding Primer Pitt-Tech Primer 90-712 N/A


319 Acrylic Metal Siding Paint Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Bond-Plex Coating Pitt-Tech+ 90-912 Tufcote 1.9 HG-D™


2.0 – 5.0

320 Acrylic Dryfall Coating Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Spraylastic WB Dryfall 6-72_xi Super-Tech WB DF N/A


321 Vinyl Ester Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Corobond VE Primer N/A N/A

2.0 – 3.0

322 Vinyl Ester Coating Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Magnalux 304 N/A N/A

14.0 – 16.0


12

Table 3

Paint Brands


323 Vinyl Ester Novolac Coating Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Cor-CoteVEN (FF) N/A N/A

As Specified

324 Epoxy Hold Primer Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Copoxy Primer Amerlock Sealer Corlar 2.1 ST™


3.0 – 12.0

325 High Chemical Resistant Epoxy Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Cor-Cote HCR Sigma CSF650 N/A

As Specified As Specified

326 Solvent Resistant Epoxy Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Phenicon HS (FF) PhenGuard 930 N/A


327 Sodium Hypochlorite Resistant Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Chemline 784/32 Sigma NovaGuard N/A


328 Epoxy Patching & Surfacing Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

FT 910 Nu-Klad 114a N/A

As Required As Specified

329 Urethane Alkyd Enamel Sherwin-Williams PPG DuPont

Ind. Urethane Alkyd 7-line Industrial Enamel Tufcote 3.5 HG-P™


2.0 – 5.0

330 High Temperature Coating Sherwin-Williams Silver-Brite Hi-Heat B59S3 0.4 – 0.5

331 Not Used

332 Amine Epoxy Metal Casting Surfaces Carboline Multi-gard® 955CP

10.0 – 15.0 Per Coat 2 Coats

Recommended*

333 Amine Epoxy Cementitious Casting Surfaces Wise Chem E-212F

15.0 – 20.0 Per Coat 1 Coat

Recommended* *Refer to OEM recommendation details

8. PAINT APPLICATION

8.1 General 8.1.1 When painting at a Novelis site, care shall be taken to avoid paint drift into adjacent

areas. This applies to painting near aluminum, stainless, copper and galvanized metals; instrumentation, and exteriors of metal buildings. The contractor shall be responsible for paint or dirt and other debris which lands on unintended surfaces


13

including automobiles, buildings, or equipment. In remelt and casting areas, the contractor shall take extra precaution around molten metal to avoid the introduction of any contaminants into the liquid metal stream. Additional molten metal safety precautions beyond the usual PPE measures will also be required. The contractor shall clean or replace any items damaged by overspray, drift, dripped, or spilled paint. The contractor shall supply automobile covers when necessary.

8.1.2 Painting operations, including placement of equipment, scaffolding, and supplies are subject to direction of Novelis, to avoid interference with plant operations and the work of other crafts, and to comply with safety requirements of Novelis.

8.1.3 Apply specified protective coatings on surfaces made inaccessible for painting, prior to the installation of the covering materials such as corrugated siding and roofing, and encasement by masonry when free space is allowed around unit to be protected.

8.1.4 Manufacturer’s serial number plates, Underwriter’s labels and similar equipment markings shall be protected during painting operations, and shall not be painted over.

8.1.5 Masking will be removed after it has served its purpose. 8.1.6 Maintenance painting of structural steel in plant areas will always include handrails,

toe plate, and ladders unless specifically noted otherwise. 8.1.7 Grating will be temporarily lifted by the painting contractor to allow surface

preparation and painting of structural steel. 8.1.8 Surfaces to be insulated will receive a finish coat of Epoxy Intermediate (Section 7.2,

Table 3, 305) in place of a polyurethane top coat. The top coat will be of contrasting color to the first intermediate coat.

8.1.9 Equipment and/or piping which has been coated should be cleaned with compressed air to remove any loose debris such as blasting aggregate, dust etc. from the inside surfaces. Once the internal surfaces have been cleaned, end-caps should be applied to prevent further contamination.

8.1.10 Surfaces must be free of visible moisture immediately before and after painting until the paint is dry to touch. Coatings shall not be applied if the surface temperature is within 3°C (5°F) of the dew point or if the material, substrate, or ambient temperature is below 4°C (40°F). For application below 4°C (40°F), consult with the manufacturer for availability of products. For other environmental restrictions, refer to the manufacturer's data sheet.

8.1.11 All welds, flanges, nuts, and bolts shall be brush coated before spraying paint to ensure complete coverage. When spraying is not possible, the full coat shall be applied by brush or roller.

8.1.12 When painting in the field, all abrasive cleaning and prime coating shall be done before any finish coat is started. A water wash shall be performed between the prime and intermediate or finish coats.

8.1.13 When painting equipment and materials that will be field welded, the area that might be burned by the welding shall be left unpainted. For example, nozzles and pipe ends that will be welded shall be left uncoated for a length of 50 mm alongside the weld. These areas will be field painted after welding.

8.2 Workmanship 8.2.1 Each paint coat shall be smooth, free of defects, fully bonded, of proper thickness, of

uniform color and completely clean at the time of applying the succeeding coat. The top coat shall have a smooth and uniform color and finish. Defects shall be repaired at Contractor’s expense.


14

8.2.2 Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and may be subject to inspection at all times by representatives of Novelis and the Manufacturer.

8.2.3 A moisture trap shall be placed in line from air supply to pressure pot and spray gun. This trap shall be opened slightly to provide continuous bleed.

8.2.4 Blasted or otherwise prepared surfaces shall be coated with one coat of primer during the same day as the blasting or other surface preparation was performed.

8.2.5 Regulators and gauges shall be provided for air to both the pressure pot and spray gun.

8.2.6 During Application, paint materials shall be kept at uniform consistency, thoroughly mixed and stirred. Painter’s buckets and opened containers must contain no settled or unused pigment or other solids when depleted.

8.2.7 Spray guns must be held perpendicular to the surface being painted, and handled and adjusted in such a manner that dry overspray is kept to a minimum.

8.2.8 Paints and primers shall be delivered to the job site in the original package bearing the manufacturer’s name and brand. Before application, they shall be stirred or agitated until the ingredients are completely mixed per manufacturer’s recommendation. Materials which have a tendency to settle rapidly must be stirred frequently while being applied. No material shall be used or mixed into a new batch after its recommended pot life has been exceeded.

8.2.9 Car and foot traffic on painted surfaces should be prevented until the paint has cured. 8.2.10 Allow adequate time for paint to properly cure before applying a succeeding coat as

in the applicable manufacturer’s coating system specification or the paint manufacturer’s printed instructions.

8.2.11 Each application of material shall be a complete, full coverage coat which develops the specified cumulative dry film thickness as measured on uniform surface areas. Such coats shall be applied according to the painting systems specified in Table 4.

8.2.12 Paint material shall be maintained at a temperature and consistency, which will give the best results from the standpoint of uniformity and speed of application. The proper viscosity may be obtained by control of temperature, by thinning or both, per manufacturer’s recommendations.

8.2.13 Contrasting colors will be used for subsequent coats to distinguish between them.

9. PAINT SYSTEMS 9.1 General

9.1.1 Approved systems for painting and repainting of buildings, equipment and concrete are specified in Table 4 to assist in the selection of materials.

9.1.2 The contractor is responsible for selecting materials in accordance with these specifications. Deviations from any paint system may be proposed, but must be approved by Novelis Representative. Painting system selection shall be made on the basis of the equipment or structure design temperature (rather than operating temperature or otherwise).

9.1.3 Different and appropriate paint systems shall be used where sections of equipment have different design conditions, such as the exposed legs of an insulated high temperature vessel. The whole equipment item may be painted with the same system, only if the paint will properly cure as per the manufacturer's instructions. The change in paint system might be at the outside of the thermal insulation. The painting contractor should contact Novelis if assistance is needed with the paint selection and boundaries.


15

9.2 Approved Coatings 9.2.1 Zinc-rich coatings may contain organic or inorganic zinc material. The manufacturer's

recommendations shall be followed for all application techniques and restrictions, including DFT, profile, mixing, amount of zinc dust, environmental conditions, and drying time. Refer to Section 7.2, Table 3, for preferred coatings and selection of alternates. Alternates to the preferred coating must meet quality, performance, and application standards. Overcoating of zinc-rich coatings should be performed only with epoxy mastic coatings.

9.2.2 Epoxy mastic coatings shall be a two-component, high build, polyamide product with more than 60% solids by volume. They shall be suitable for overcoating, with a recoat time of more than 30 days. Application of epoxy mastics shall be in accordance with the following: • Total DFT of paint shall follow manufacturer's recommendation. When sprayed or

brushed on, this can be achieved in one coat; however, when rolled on, epoxy mastics shall be applied in two coats achieving manufacturer's recommended thickness.

• When applying epoxy mastics, contractor must review the product sheet and make sure maximum recoat window is not exceeded before finish coat is applied.

9.2.3 Acrylic polyurethane finish coats shall be a two-component, high-build, durable, high-gloss product with a gloss ratio of 90 units. The finish coat must have a minimum of 60% solids with a drying time of eight hours or less. It may be sprayed, rolled, or brushed on to achieve a total DFT per manufacturer's recommendation. Refer to Section 7.2, Table 3, for preferred coatings and selection of alternates. Alternates to the preferred coating must meet quality, performance, and application standards.

9.2.4 Direct-to-metal (DTM) coatings are water-based, 100% acrylic emulsion primer/finish coatings that can be used to cover previously painted surfaces. They are chemical-resistant, fast drying, and contain 45% solids by volume. DTM can be sprayed, brushed, or rolled on surfaces. The DFT shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. Alternates to the preferred coating must meet quality, performance, and application standards.

9.2.5 Alternate coatings to those listed in Table 4 are allowed. Approval can be gained through requests to the Novelis Representative.

Alternate material requests shall include the manufacturer's name, product data sheets, manufacturing plant information, and e-mail address for manufacturer's technical contact. E-mail the information to the Novelis Representative. The manufacturer will need to provide a quality guarantee in writing, along with detailed application guidelines.

9.2.6 Paint system for carbon steel materials shall be selected from Section Table 4 as determined by the design temperature of the item to be painted. These systems do require primers; under no circumstances shall zinc-based primers be used under insulation.

9.2.7 Paint system for stainless steel materials shall be selected from Table 3 as detemined by the material and design temperature of the item be painted. These systems do not require primers; under no circumstances shall zinc-based primers be used under insulation.

9.2.8 Organic cold galvanizing compounds must be approved by Novelis. All repairs of galvanized surfaces shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's data sheet and ASTM A 780. Coatings shall be sprayed or brushed on in multiple coats to achieve a total DFT of 8 mils or 200 µm.


16

9.3 Summary of Paint Systems

Table 4

Paint Systems

System Surface Prep Prime Intermediate Finish

401 New Carbon Steel and New Equipment SP6 Inorganic Zinc

301 H. B. Epoxy

305 Polyurethane

306

402 New Carbon Steel, Field Touch-Up SP1/SP2/SP3 or SP11

Epoxy Primer 304 or 311

H. B. Epoxy 305

Polyurethane 306

403 Previously Coated Steel (Mild Surface Corrosion) SP1/SP2/SP3 See Sect 6.2

332 H. B. Epoxy

308 Polyurethane

306

404 Previously Coated Steel (Visible Rust) SP6

Epoxy Primer See Sect 6.2

304

H. B. Epoxy 308

Polyurethane 306

405 Precast Concrete – Previously Coated

SP1/SP2/SP3 SP13

Sealer 302 Filler 328

H. B. Epoxy 305

Polyurethane 306

406 Precast Concrete – New SP7 SP13


H. B. Epoxy 305

Polyurethane 306

407 Masonry Block – Previously Coated SP1/SP2/SP3 SP13


H. B. Epoxy 305

Polyurethane 306

408 Masonry Block – New SP1/SP2/SP3 SP13

Block Filler 307

H. B. Epoxy 305

Polyurethane 306

409 New Galvanized Steel SP1 Wash Primer 303

H. B. Epoxy 305

Polyurethane 306

410 Weathered Galvanized Steel SP1/SP2/SP3 Epoxy Primer 304

H. B. Epoxy 308

Polyurethane 306

411 Shop Primed Equipment SP11 Epoxy Primer 304

H. B. Epoxy 305

Polyurethane 306

412 Cold Surfaces (not to be Insulated) SP6 (New) SP1/2/3 (Exist)

Hi-Temperature 331 N/A Hi-Temperature

331

413 Cold Surfaces (to be Insulated) SP6 (New) SP1/2/3 (Exist)


331

414 Hot Surfaces (not to be Insulated) SP5 (New) SP1/2/3 (Exist)

Epoxy CUTI 312 N/A Epoxy CUTI

312

415 Hot Surfaces (to be Insulated) SP6 (New) SP1/2/3 (Exist)


331

416 Steel in Highly Corrosive Areas SP5 (New) SP1/2/3 (Exist)

Mastic Primer 308

Polyurethane 306

Polyurethane 306

417 Wood – Previously Coated SP1/SP2/SP3 Acrylic Coating 313 N/A Acrylic Coating

313


17

Table 4

Paint Systems System Surface Prep Prime Intermediate Finish

418 Wood – New (Non-Pressure Treated) SP1/SP2/SP3 Acrylic Coating

314 Acrylic Coating

313 Acrylic Coating

313

419 Chain Link Fencing - Rusted SP3 Aluminum 316 N/A Aluminum

316

420 Concrete Containment (Caustic & Acid) SP13 VE Primer

321 VEN System

323 VEN System

323

421 Gypsum Board – New N/A Acrylic Primer 317

Acrylic Coating 313

Acrylic Coating 313

422 Gypsum Board – Previously Coated SP1 Acrylic Primer 317

Acrylic Coating 313

Acrylic Coating 313

423 Steel Handrails SP6 (New) SP1/2/3 (Exist)

Epoxy 305 Sealer 302

H.B. Epoxy 305

Polyurethane 306

424 Galvanized Handrails SP1/2/3 (Exist) or SP7

Epoxy Sealer 302

H.B. Epoxy 305

Polyurethane 306

425 Metal Siding SP2/SP3 (Exist) Acrylic Coating 319 N/A Acrylic Coating

319

426 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames SP1/SP2/SP3 Sealer 302

Polyurethane 306

Polyurethane 306

427 Metal Grating SP6 (New) SP1/2/3 (Exist)

Epoxy 305 Sealer 302

H.B. Epoxy 305

H.B. Epoxy 305

428 Fiber Reinforced Plastic SP1/SP2/SP3 H.B. Epoxy 305 N/A H.B. Epoxy

305

429 Metal Ceiling Decking & Bar Joist Moderate Exposure

SP1/SP2/SP3 or SP12

Acrylic Dry Fall 320 N/A Acrylic Dry Fall

320

430 Metal Ceiling Decking & Bar Joist Severe Exposure

SP1/SP2/SP3 or SP12

Epoxy Sealer 302

H.B. Epoxy 305

H.B. Epoxy 305

431 Not Used

432 High Temperature Steel

SP6 (<500°F) SP10 (>500°F)

Hi-Temperature 330

Hi-Temperature 330

Hi-Temperature 330

433 General Maintenance – Miscellaneous SP1/SP2/SP3 Alkyd Primer

315 Urethane Alkyd

329 Urethane Alkyd

329

434 *Metal Casting Surfaces SP1/SP2/SP3 SP6

**Amine Epoxy 332 N/A N/A

435 *Cementitious Casting Surfaces SP1/SP7 **Amine Epoxy 333 N/A N/A


18

* Refer to the Aluminum Association’s “Guidelines for Molten Metal Handling” and Coating Suppliers recommendations.

**Self-Priming 9.3.1 Finish Colors – Refer to latest color code scheme on the EHS portal.

10. QUALITY ASSURANCE-INSPECTION 10.1 The work performed by the Contractor shall be subject at all times to inspection by a

Novelis Representative. The Novelis Representative’s decision as to amount, quality, and acceptability of the work, materials, and the fulfillment of this standard as it relates to the project specific specification shall be final and conclusive.

10.2 Surface Preparation Quality 10.2.1 Acceptability of surfaces prepared by Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning will be judged on

the basis of visual examination and visual comparison with SSPC-VIS 1 “Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning”.

10.2.2 Acceptability of surfaces prepared by Hand Cleaning or Power Tool Cleaning will be judged on the basis of visual examination and visual comparison with SSPC-VIS 3 “Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Power- and Hand-Tool Cleaning”.

10.2.3 Acceptability of surfaces prepared by Waterjetting will be judged on the basis of visual examination and visual comparison with SSPC VIS-4/NACE VIS 7 “Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Waterjetting”.

10.2.4 Acceptability of surfaces prepared by Wet Abrasive Blast Cleaning will be judged on the basis of visual examination and visual comparison with SSPC VIS-5/ NACE VIS 9 “Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Wet Abrasive Blast Cleaning”.

10.2.5 Acceptability of Steel Surface Profile shall be judged on the basis of ASTM D4417-93 (Re-approved 1999) “Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel”.

10.2.6 Acceptability of Concrete Surface Preparation shall be judged on the basis of SSPC- SP13/ NACE No. 6, ICRI Guideline No. 03732, including Concrete Surface Profile representative samples (CSP-1 through CSP-9) as required.

10.3 Inspection of Coated and Lined Surfaces 10.3.1 Film Thickness specifications must be met by measurement of plane surfaces.

Coverage of edges will be judged by visual examination. Thickness measurements on steel surfaces shall be judged with calibrated Type I or Type II Gauges and measured in accordance with SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 2 (PA2) “Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages” Failure to meet specified thickness requirements is cause for rejection of the work.

10.3.2 Work may be rejected if there is evidence of poor workmanship. Acceptable finished work must be free of detrimental dust and dirt inclusions, overspray, pinholes, runs, and sags, and must be uniform in color and even and continuous in appearance. Reference SSPC Painting Manual, Volume 1, 4th Edition “Good Painting Practice” for general requirements.

10.3.3 Pinhole (Holiday) testing shall be performed when specified by Novelis or Coating Manufacturer in accordance with ASTM D4787-08 “Standard Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete”, ASTM D5162-08 “Standard Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Non-Conductive Protective


19

Coatings on Metallic Substrates, and NACE RP0188-88 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings.

10.3.4 Additional physical testing including but not limited to cured coating hardness, solvent resistance, adhesion, moisture vapor transmission rate, internal humidity, temperature, units of gloss, or other industry recognized test method deemed suitable for determination and final acceptance of the applied coating system.

10.3.5 The contractor should furnish copies of the daily work log detailing the area of work, air monitoring, ambient weather conditions- air, surface, and material temperature, relative humidity, dew point, chloride testing, surface preparation method and degree of cleanliness achieved, blast profile, coatings used (manufacturer name, description, catalog no.) batch and color numbers, method of application, wet film thickness, dry film thickness, number of gallons used, square feet of work completed, number of hours worked and all other pertinent data.

10.3.6 Sample forms are attached in the Appendices. Contractor-supplied forms should be reviewed by Novelis Representative to determine acceptability.

10.4 Correction of Defects 10.4.1 The contractor will be advised as quickly as possible of any defective or

unacceptable work so that correction may be made with minimum delay. 10.4.2 Inadequate surface preparation and rejected portions of the coating shall be

corrected, as agreed upon between Novelis and the contractor to make the work acceptable at the contractor’s sole expense.


20

11. APPENDIX A PAINT SCHEDULE

Plant Location: Project No: Inquiry Number:

Completed by Novelis Representative Completed by Contractor (Submit with Bid)

Item Item to be Painted D-3359-02

Current Conditions

Test Results

Average DFT

(Mil/Micron) Specific Location

Surface Prep Comments

Quantity Prime Paint (Gal/Liter)

Quantity Finish Paint (Gal/Liter)

Estimated Surface Area (Square Feet/ Square Meter)

Material Cost Labor Cost Total Labor and Material Cost

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

TOTALS

Contractor: Quotation Number Date


21

12. APPENDIX COATING DAILY PROJECT INSPECTION REPORT

Inspector: Date:

Safety Items

Foreman: Site:

Time Location Dry Bulb Wet Bulb Relative Humidity Dew Point Surface Temp. 5°F/3°C

Surface-Dew

Item Name Operation Cleanliness Spec Profile Reading Coating (Product & Batch No.)

Batch No.

Amount Mix Thinner Name & Amount

Surface Preparation √=Good, N/A, X= Fail Coating application √=Good, N/A, X= Fail Miscellaneous

Condition of the Edges, Weld Spatter, Etc. Protective Covering Number of Painter On-Site?

Grease and Oil Removed Surround Air Clean How Many Hours/Shift?

Ground Cover Type of Application

Clean and Dry Abrasive Intercoat Cleanliness

Type and Size Abrasive Wind Direction

Has all Abrasive Clean up (Daily) Visible Moisture

Water Washer Pressure Soluble Salt Testing

Compressed Air Check What is the PH Reading

Any Oil Leaks or Leaks on Air Hoses MSDS Reviewed


22

Nozzle psi

Data Sheet Reviewed

SP-1

SP-2 or SP-3 or SP-11

SP-5, NACE 1 or SP-10, NACE 2

SP-6, NACE 3

Airless

SP-7, NACE 4

Spray Conventional

Blotter Test

Brush and Roll

Profile (Using Replica Tape)

Holiday Detection Req.

ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis

Avg. W.F.T

WJ-1, WJ-2, WJ-3 or WJ-4 Avg. D.F.T

Operation Permitted Operation Permitted Signature


23

Record of Revisions Rev Date By Pages Description

0 31 Oct 2011 rwr All Issued

1 17 Feb 2012 rwr 20 Page 20, 9.2.10 Finish Colors, Deleted Table 5. Reference made to color code scheme on EHS portal.

2 15 Mar 2012 rwr 2,3,4,7, 14,20

Sections 2.1; 5.4.1;5.5.1; 6.4.2; 7.2; 8.1.1; 9.2.9 Included references to molten metal applications

3 4 Apr 2012 rwr 14,17,20 Modified Table 3 (Modified 330 and Removed 331); Removed reference to Table 5; Modified Table 4 (Removed 431 and changed 432);

Novelis Facilities - Standard ColorCorresponding Color References

Item Novelis Color Safety Color (OSHA)Safety Color (ANSI) -

Pantone Color #Pantone Color # RAL Color Name RAL Color # Represented Color

Structural Steel - walls and ceiling White N/A White White Pure White R9010

Pure White or Silver (for bare metal, i.e.Manufacturing Building Interior - Ceiling

Pure White or Silver (for bare metal, i.e.galvanized, aluminize, etc. that is generally

silver)N/A White White Pure White R9010

Equipment - Heat resistant process Gray N/A N/A 443C White Aluminum R9006

Equipment - process Dark Green N/A N/A 3305C Pine-tree Green R6028

Equipment - cranes Yellow Yellow -- 13591 Yellow -- 109C 109C Traffic Yellow R1023

Equipment - capable of moving Orange Orange -- 12300 Orange -- 152C 152C Yellow Orange R2000

Basements - walls (not in phase 1 scope) White N/A White White Pure White R9010

Basement - ceilings (not in phase 1 scope) White N/A White White Pure White R9010

Manufacturing Floor - General use Gray or Unpainted N/A Gray -- 421C 421C Agate Gray R7038

Manufacturing Floor - Load Restricted Red Red -- 11120 Red -- 485C 485C Traffic Red R3020

Cranes and Mobile Equipment Yellow Yellow -- 13591 Yellow -- 109C 109C Traffic Yellow R1023Cranes and Mobile Equipment Yellow Yellow -- 13591 Yellow -- 109C 109C Traffic Yellow R1023

Automated Guided Vehicles (AGV) Yellow Yellow -- 13591 Yellow -- 109C 109C Traffic Yellow R1023

Guard Rails and Machine Guarding Yellow Yellow -- 13591 Yellow -- 109C 109C Traffic Yellow R1023

Mesh integrated with Machine Guarding Yellow Border with Black MeshYellow -- 13591 Black -

- 17038Yellow -- 109C Black -

- Process Black109C (Yellow Border) +

Black 3 C (Mesh)Traffic Yellow Traffic

BlackR1018 (Yellow Border) +

R9017 (Black Mesh)Mesh integrated with Machine Guarding Yellow Border with Black Mesh

- 17038 - Process Black Black 3 C (Mesh) Black R9017 (Black Mesh)

Stairs Dark Green N/A N/A 3305CPine-tree Green or

Chrome GreenR6028

Handrails Yellow Yellow -- 13591 Yellow -- 109C 109C Traffic Yellow R1023

Walkway swinging gates Orange Orange -- 12300 Orange -- 152C 152C Yellow Orange R2000

Column or Wall Marking - Fire Protection equipmentlocation - minimum 3 meters high

Red Red -- 11120 Red -- 485C 485C Traffic Red R3020

Floor Marking, Pedestrian Aisle way - accessible bymobile equipment

Yellow with Light Green BandsYellow -- 13591 Green -

- 14120Yellow -- 109C Green -

- 3415C

109C (Yellow) with3415C (Light Green

Bands)

Traffic Yellow SignalGreen

R1023 (Yellow) withR6032 (Light Green

Bands)

Revision #8Dated: August 25, 2011

Novelis Facilities - Standard ColorCorresponding Color References

Item Novelis Color Safety Color (OSHA)Safety Color (ANSI) -

Pantone Color #Pantone Color # RAL Color Name RAL Color # Represented Color

Floor Marking, Aisle way crossing mobile equipmentpath

Yellow w/ Black StripesYellow -- 13591 Black -

- 17038Yellow -- 109C Black -

- Process Black109C (Yellow) with

Process Black (strips)Traffic YellowTraffic Black

R1023 (Yellow) withR9017 (Black Strips)

Floor Marking, Pedestrian Aisle way - Physicallyisolated from mobile equipment

Light Green Green -- 14120 Green -- 3415C 3415C Signal Green R6032

Floor Marking , Caution -physical hazards such astripping or falling points, etc.

Yellow Yellow -- 13591 Yellow -- 109C 109C Traffic Yellow R1023

Floor Marking, Safe - (1st Aid Supplies, SafetyLight Green Green -- 14120 Green -- 3415C 3415C Signal Green R6032

Floor Marking, Safe - (1st Aid Supplies, SafetyEquipment, Eye Wash, Showers, Safety Information)

Light Green Green -- 14120 Green -- 3415C 3415C Signal Green R6032

Floor Marking, Warning - Energized equipment,equipment that moves (AGV)

Orange Orange -- 12300 Orange -- 152C 152C Yellow Orange R2000

Floor marking - movable hatch Unpainted or Yellow w/ Black StripesYellow -- 13591Black -- 17038

Yellow -- 109C Black -- Process Black

109C Yellow withProcess Black (strips)

Traffic Yellow TrafficBlack

R1023 (Yellow) withR9017 (Black Strips)

Floor marking, Danger - Stop Red Red -- 11120 Red -- 485C 485C Traffic Red R3020Floor marking, Danger - Stop Red Red -- 11120 Red -- 485C 485C Traffic Red R3020

Manufacturing Building - miscellaneous Dark Blue Blue -- 15092 Blue -- 2945C 2945C Signal Blue R5005

Revision #8Dated: August 25, 2011

STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.15 - 1

SECTION 102113.15 - STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal

screens.


1. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab

bars, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.

2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.

3. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars and locations of

blocking for surface-mounted toilet accessories.

4. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

5. Show ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and overhead support or bracing locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-

inch- (152-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

2. Each type of hardware and accessory.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.



A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners.

2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners.

3. Door Bumper: One door bumper(s) with associated fasteners.

4. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners.

5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and

other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before

fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 for toilet

compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS



1. All American Metal Corp.

2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.

3. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.

4. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.

5. Marlite.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Ceiling hung.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung flat panel.

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core

material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures;

corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall

be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material,

or other imperfections.







1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-

impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25

mm) for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for pilasters.

2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars

mounted on units of size and material adequate for panel to withstand applied downward

load on grab bar of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446,

without deformation of panel.

3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at

locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.

E. Urinal-Screen Construction:

1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction.

F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses as follows:

1. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than

0.050 inch (1.27 mm).

2. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch (0.79 mm).

3. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch (0.79 mm).

4. Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels.

G. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch (0.79-mm)

nominal thickness and 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware.

H. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

I. Stainless-Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured finish on exposed faces. Protect

exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipment.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Stainless steel.

2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially

open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door.

3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for

emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide

units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments

designated as accessible.

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized

to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.

6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at

compartments designated as accessible.


B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished

to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for

through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel,

or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel anchors compatible with related materials.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

D. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate

requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories and solid blocking

within panel where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies

with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished

ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to

finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-

swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging

doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments designated as

accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance

of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,

straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring

devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-

height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten.

Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in

closed position.

C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and

plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open

approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging

doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION 102113.15

WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Corner guards.


1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit.

B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent.

Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.


A. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance

manuals.

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum

condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include

precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to

plastic finishes and performance.


A. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same

production run as installed units.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.


B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single

manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-

resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

D. Revise subparagraph below to suit Project.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory

data to Architect for review.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,

and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where

exposed to view.

2.2 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded metal

with formed edges; with 90-degree turn.



the following:

a. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.

b. Construction Specialties, Inc.

c. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.

d. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation.

e. Pawling Corporation.

f. WallGuard.com.

2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.

a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.

3. Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (90 by 90 mm).

4. Corner Radius: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

5. Mounting: Flat-head, countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting holes.








2.3 METAL FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

3. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

4. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a

standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.


TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Underlavatory guards.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation.

3. Material and finish descriptions.

4. Features that will be included for Project.

5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each

accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify products using designations indicated.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.



A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products

from single source from single manufacturer.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required

for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,

cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent

delaying the Work.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace

mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness

unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products

with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-

inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-

theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.


2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES



1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

2. American Specialties, Inc.

3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

4. Bradley Corporation.

B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:

1. Description: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset.

2. Mounting: Surface mounted.

3. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindle.

4. Capacity: Designed for 5-inch- (127-mm-) diameter tissue rolls.

5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

C. Combination Towel (Roll) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:

1. Description: Combination unit for dispensing preset length of roll paper towels, with

removable waste receptacle.

2. Mounting: Surface-mounted.

3. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 8-inch- (203-mm-) wide, 800-foot- (244-m-) long

roll.

4. Minimum Waste Receptacle Capacity: 15 gal. (56.8 L).


6. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner.

7. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel dispenser compartment.

D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:

1. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.

2. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted.

3. Capacity: 1,000 mL

4. Materials: Black ABS Plastic

5. Lockset: Tumbler type.

6. Refill Indicator: Window type.

E. Grab Bar:

1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.

2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).

3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:

1. Mounting: Surface mounted.

2. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler

lockset.

3. Receptacle: Removable.







G. Mirror Unit:

1. Frame: Stainless-steel channel.

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated

below.

a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking

mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

3. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS



1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.

2. Truebro by IPS Corporation.

B. Underlavatory Guard:

1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent

direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing

coverings.

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and

access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with

corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.

Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested

according to ASTM F 446.





A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire

extinguishers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and

mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-

protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable

Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.

1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 10-A:120-B:C, 20-lb (9.1-kg)

nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel

container. For installation at all locations indicated, unless otherwise noted.

C. Halon Type: UL-rated 10-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg) nominal capacity, in enameled-steel container;

with pressure-indicating gage. For installation in Control Room.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers

indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,

spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in

red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.


1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in

compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire

extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations

indicated.


METAL LOCKERS 105113 - 1

SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Knocked-down corridor lockers.


A. Product data.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and

locker identification system and numbering sequence.

C. Samples: For each color specified.


A. Sample warranties.


A. Maintenance data.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that

fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial

Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable

provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA

Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1.


2.2 KNOCKED-DOWN CORRIDOR LOCKERS



1. AJW Architectural Products.

2. Art Metal Products.

3. ASI Storage Solutions; ASI Group.

4. General Storage Systems Ltd.

5. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.

6. List Industries Inc.

7. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.

8. Olympus Lockers & Storage Products, Inc.

9. Penco Products, Inc.

10. Republic Storage Systems, LLC.

11. Shanahan's Manufacturing Limited.

12. WEC Manufacturing LLC.

B. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075-inch (1.90-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed

into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at

horizontal edges.

1. Doors less than 12 inches (305 mm) wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm)

nominal-thickness steel sheet.

2. Doors for box lockers less than 15 inches (381 mm) wide may be fabricated from 0.048-

inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.

3. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for

doors more than 15 inches (381 mm) wide; welded to inner face of doors.

4. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-

mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors.

5. Door Style: Unperforated panel.

C. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from unperforated

steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:

1. Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) nominal thickness, with

single bend at sides.

2. Backs and Sides: 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) nominal thickness, with full-height, double-

flanged connections.

3. Shelves: 0.024-inch (0.61-mm)nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single

bend at sides and back.

D. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet;

lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into

vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral, full-height door strikes on vertical main

frames.

E. Hinges:

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, continuous or knuckle type.















F. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either built-in

combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated; pry and vandal

resistant.

1. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches (1219 mm) and higher with three latch hooks and

doors less than 48 inches (1219 mm) high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 0.105-

inch (2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door

strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.

2. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism and

moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a

prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed

without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism.

G. Locks: Combination padlocks.

H. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates,

with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch (9 mm) high.

I. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type hooks, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.

J. Coat Rods: Manufacturer's standard.

K. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than

0.036-inch (0.91-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.

1. Closures: Hipped-end type.

L. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.

M. Filler Panels: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036-inch

(0.91-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.

N. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.

O. Center Dividers: Fabricated from 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.

P. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,

suitable for exposed applications.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;

with A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron, alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.

Q. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.


2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents

or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.


B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and

back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame

members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment:

1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks.

D. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for

nominal assembly at Project site.

E. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:

1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches (381 mm) above the floor.

2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48

inches (1219 mm) above the floor.

F. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as

long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

G. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at

splice locations; finished to match lockers.

H. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) face width and in lengths as long

as practical; finished to match lockers.

I. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip-

joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.

J. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for

perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

K. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match

lockers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more

than 36 inches (910 mm) o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup

reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.

B. Knocked-Down Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door

faces or face frames.

C. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight,

hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.


1. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips.

2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners.

3. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.


CASH III BATHROOM AND BREAKROOM FACILITY

Documents

Transcript of CASH III BATHROOM AND BREAKROOM FACILITY